Yamaha RX-V2700 Owner`s manual

RX-V2700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 24, 2006 3:36 PM
U
RX-V2700
RX-V2700
AV Receiver
© 2006
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
All rights reserved.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Printed in Malaysia
WJ55210
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
10
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
•
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may
cause the product and cart combination to
overturn.
Caution-i
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
d)
20
21
22
23
If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f)
When the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance - this indicates a need for service.
Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24
Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
Caution-ii
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit
with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will
not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of
this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.
vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main
room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power
plug from the AC wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are as follows:
................................. 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
Responsible Party:
Address:
Yamaha Electronics Corporation, U.S.A.
6660 Orangethorpe Avenue
Buena Park, CA 90620
Telephone:
714-522-9105
Fax:
714-670-0108
Type of Equipment: AV Receiver
Model Name:
RX-V2700
Caution-iii
• This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
• Operation is subject to the following conditions:
– This device may not cause harmful interference.
– This device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section at the end of this
manual if interference to radio reception is suspected.
TRADEMARK NOTICES
Note on Source Code Distribution
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital
Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved.
This product includes software code subject to the GNU General
Public License (GPL) or the GNU Lesser General Public License
(LGPL). The copy, distribution, or change of this software code is
licensed under the terms of the GPL or the LGPL. The source
code is available at the following website:
http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/
The source code is also available on a physical media (such as a
CD-ROM) at actual cost.
Contact: AV products division, YAMAHA CORPORATION,
10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Hamamatsu 430-8650, Japan
iPod®
In principle, the source code is offered for 3 years from the day of
purchase.
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries
Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want
you to get the most out of your equipment by
playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound
come through loud and clear without annoying
blaring or distortion – and, most importantly,
without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage
from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late,
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure
from excessive volume levels.
This receiver supports network connections.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM
Satellite Radio Inc.
Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned
by Neural Audio Corporation.
Windows XP, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
corporation in the United States and/or countries.
1 En
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
FEATURES .............................................................4
GETTING STARTED ............................................5
Supplied accessories .................................................. 5
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS..........................6
Front panel................................................................. 6
Remote control .......................................................... 8
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................. 10
Preparing the remote control ................................... 11
Front panel display .................................................. 12
Rear panel ................................................................ 14
PREPARATION
CONNECTIONS................................................... 15
Placing speakers ...................................................... 15
Connecting speakers ................................................ 16
Using bi-amplification connections......................... 19
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 20
Information on HDMI ............................................. 21
Audio and video signal flow.................................... 22
Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 23
Connecting other components ................................. 24
Connecting a multi-format player
or an external decoder ......................................... 28
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 29
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 29
Connecting the network........................................... 30
Connecting the FM and AM antennas..................... 31
Connecting the power cable .................................... 32
Setting the speaker impedance ................................ 33
Turning on and off the power .................................. 34
AUTO SETUP ....................................................... 35
USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 52
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 52
Adjusting the tonal quality ...................................... 52
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 53
Enjoying multi-channel sources
in 2-channel stereo .............................................. 53
Selecting the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode .................................................... 54
Selecting the night listening mode........................... 55
FM/AM TUNING ................................................. 56
FM/AM controls and functions ............................... 56
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 57
Manual tuning.......................................................... 58
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 59
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 60
Selecting preset stations........................................... 61
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 62
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING .................. 63
Connecting the XM Passport System ...................... 63
XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 64
Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 65
Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 67
Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 72
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 73
USING iPod........................................................... 75
Controlling iPod ...................................................... 75
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES.............. 77
Navigating the network and USB menus ................ 77
Using a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 ......... 79
Using the Internet Radio.......................................... 80
Using a USB memory device
or a USB portable audio player ........................... 81
Using shortcut buttons ............................................. 81
RECORDING ....................................................... 83
Using Auto Setup..................................................... 35
ADVANCED OPERATION
BASIC OPERATION
PLAYBACK .......................................................... 40
Basic procedure ....................................................... 40
Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 42
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 43
Using your headphones ........................................... 43
Muting the audio output .......................................... 43
Operating the amplifier functions of this unit
by using the graphical user interface (GUI)
screen................................................................... 44
Playing video sources
in the background of an audio source.................. 45
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 45
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ............................. 46
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 46
Sound field program descriptions............................ 47
Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 51
2 En
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS .... 84
Selecting decoders ................................................... 84
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI)
SCREEN............................................................ 87
Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) ............... 88
Input Select .............................................................. 94
Manual Setup (Sound) ............................................. 97
Manual Setup (Video) ........................................... 101
Manual Setup (Basic) ............................................ 104
Manual Setup (NET/USB)..................................... 109
Manual Setup (Option) .......................................... 111
System Memory..................................................... 115
Signal Info. (Input signal information).................. 116
Language ............................................................... 117
CONTENTS
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES................. 118
INTRODUCTION
Controlling this unit, a TV,
or other components .......................................... 118
Setting remote control codes ................................. 120
Programming codes from other remote controls ... 122
Changing source names in the display window..... 123
Macro programming features ................................ 124
Clearing configurations ......................................... 127
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION .. 130
Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 130
Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 131
ADVANCED SETUP ......................................... 134
PREPARATION
Using ADVANCED SETUP ................................. 134
Setting remote control ID ...................................... 137
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
BASIC
OPERATION
TROUBLESHOOTING..................................... 139
RESETTING THE SYSTEM ............................ 149
GLOSSARY ........................................................ 150
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
INFORMATION ............................................ 153
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER
INFORMATION ............................................ 154
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................ 155
APPENDIX
(at the end of this manual)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
SOUND OUTPUT
IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............ i
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE.................. v
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC
LICENSE............................................................ vi
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODE ............. ix
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote
control. In case the button names differ between the front
panel and the remote control, the button name on the
remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
• This unit equips GUI display menu language switching
capability. In this manual, the illustrations of the GUI are
examples when you set the GUI language to English.
3 En
FEATURES
FEATURES
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
Network features
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 140 W + 140 W
Center: 140 W
Surround: 140 W + 140 W
Surround back: 140 W + 140 W
◆ NETWORK port to connect a PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000
or access the Internet Radio via a LAN
◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration
Sound field programs
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound
fields
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx
decoder
◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
XM Satellite Radio
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM Passport
System” sold separately)
◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the surround sound
content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels,
resulting in a full surround sound experience
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or
high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal
transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on
HDMI version 1.2a
◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion
(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI
digital video) capability for monitor out
◆ Analog video up-scaling from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) or
480p/576p to 720p or 1080i
iPod controlling capability
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod
(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini
4 En
USB features
◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player
Other features
◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for
automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ GUI (graphical user interfece) menus that allows you to
optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video system
◆ GUI display menu language switching capability
(English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish and Russian)
◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multichannel input
◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from 480i
(NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability includes (3
COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound
quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to
that of a high-quality stereo
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning,
macro and buttons and display backlight capability
◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility
◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS
◆ Zone 2 OSD (on-screen display) capability
◆ Sleep timer
GETTING STARTED
GETTING STARTED
INTRODUCTION
Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
Remote control
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
AV
TV
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
DTV
VCR 1
SLEEP
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
Zone 2/Zone 3
remote control
Batteries (6)
(AAA, LR03)
POWER
CD
TUNER
STANDBY
CD-R
SELECT
DTV
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE NET/USB
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
SOURCE
TV MUTE
LEVEL
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
TV
MUTE
PRESET
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
A/B/C/D/E
MUTE
AUDIO
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
MEMORY
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
2
NIGHT
ENHANCER
0
+ 10
ENT
1 MEMORY
9
FREQ/TEXT
EON
NET RADIO
USB
MODE
ID1 ID2
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
PTY SEEK START
REC
PC/MCX
OFF
ON
MACRO LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
Speaker terminal wrench
Power cable
Optimizer microphone
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia, General,
and Korea models)
Indoor FM antenna
(Europe, U.K. and Australia models)
AM loop antenna
5 En
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about
other control and functions.
• AM/FM tuning .......................................... see page 56
• XM satellite radio tuning .......................... see page 64
1
2
3
456
7
8
9
0
A B
C
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
TONE
CONTROL
AUDIO
SELECT
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
S VIDEO
PHONES
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
OPTICAL
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
D
E
F
1 MASTER ON/OFF
Turns this unit on or off (see page 34).
2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 34).
Notes
• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
• This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.
3 INPUT selector
Selects the desired input source (see page 40).
6 En
G
H
I
(U.S.A. model)
4 AUDIO SELECT
Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack
between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and
“ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or
more input jacks (see page 42).
5 TONE CONTROL
Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left, front right
and center channels in conjunction with the PROGRAM
selector (see page 52).
6 REC OUT/ZONE2
Selects the input source you want to direct to the audio/
video recorder and Zone 2 outputs independently of the
input source you are listening to or watching in the main
zone (see page 83).
7 STRAIGHT
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
page 51).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8 MULTI ZONE buttons
ZONE 3 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 3 only or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 131).
Note
These buttons are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF
is pressed inward to the ON position.
ZONE CONTROLS
Switches the zone you want to control between the
main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 131).
y
After you press ZONE CONTROLS, the indicator for the
currently selected zone flashes in the front panel display for
approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing,
perform the desired operation.
E OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied
optimizer microphone in the “Auto Setup” procedure (see
page 35).
F
PHONES jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones (see page 43).
G VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console or a video camera
(see page 29).
y
To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
Note
9 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this unit
(see page 12).
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
0 ENHANCER
Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
(see page 54).
H USB port
Use to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player (see page 81).
A Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control (see page 11).
I VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
B NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 55).
y
C PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the Pure Direct mode (see page 52).
This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
■ Opening and closing the front panel
door
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel
door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of
the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these
controls.
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
7 En
INTRODUCTION
ZONE 2 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 2 only or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 131).
D PROGRAM selector
• Selects sound field programs (see page 46).
• Adjusts the bass/treble balance in conjunction with
TONE CONTROL (see page 52).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Remote control
■ Remote control controls and functions
This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about
other control and functions.
• AM/FM tuning .......................................... see page 56
• XM satellite radio tuning .......................... see page 64
• Controlling a TV ..................................... see page 118
• Controlling other components ................. see page 119
• Controlling option components ............... see page 120
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
PHONO
3
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
DTV
VCR 1
SLEEP
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded
area below depends on the operation mode selector position. Set
the operation mode selector to AMP to control this unit.
D
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate (see page 11).
E
F
G
2 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
1
2
Note
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source you want to control.
y
The selected input source name appears in the display window on
the remote control showing which source is currently operational.
4
SELECT
H
4 Display window
Shows the name of the selected input source that you can
control.
I
5 LIGHT
Lights up the remote control buttons and the display
window.
AMP
+
5
6
+
+
SOURCE
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
J
K
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
7
TV
PURE DIRECT
L
M
AUDIO
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
MEMORY
8
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
2
NIGHT
ENHANCER
+ 10
ENT
9
0
A
1 MEMORY
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
NET RADIO
USB
MODE
PTY SEEK START
OFF
ON
MACRO LEARN
CLEAR
O
P
Q
R
S
t
U
C
(U.S.A. model)
8 En
RENAME
7 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h, ENTER
Move the items or cursor and adjust the parameters in the
GUI screens or front panel display.
8 Sound field program selector buttons
Select sound field programs (see page 46).
REC
PC/MCX
B
N
6 LEVEL
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
output level (see page 53).
9 SUR. DECODE
Activates decoders to play back 2-channel sources in
surround (see page 84).
0 MEMORY 1/2
Recalls “MEMORY 1” or “MEMORY 2” of “System
Memory” (see page 115).
A Network and USB input selector buttons
Select the sub input source of NET/USB (see page 78).
PC/MCX
Selects a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 as the
sub input source of NET/USB.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input
selector button (see page 119).
USB
Selects a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player as the sub input source of NET/USB.
TV
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV or PHONO
(see page 118).
Notes
Notes
• Press NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input source
before you press any of the network and USB input selector
buttons stated above to select the corresponding sub input
source of NET/USB.
• When you press any of the network and USB input selector
buttons, the contents previously played for the corresponding
sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played.
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 120.
• When you set the remote control codes for both DTV and
PHONO (see page 120), priority is given to the one set for
DTV.
B MACRO ON/OFF
Turns on or off the macro function (see page 124).
C MACRO
Programs a series of operations to be controlled with a
single button (see page 124).
D STANDBY
Sets the main zone to the standby mode (see page 34).
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
E POWER
Turns on the main zone (see page 34).
Note
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
F AUDIO SEL
Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack
between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and
“ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or
more input jacks (see page 42).
G SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (see page 45).
H SELECT k / n
Selects another input source that you can control
independently of the input source selected with the input
selector buttons.
I Operation mode selector
Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons
in the shaded area.
AMP
Operates the amplifier function of this unit.
J VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
K MUTE
Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio
output to the previous volume level (see page 43).
L PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the pure direct mode (see page 52).
M SET MENU
Activates the GUI screen (see page 44).
N STRAIGHT
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
page 51).
O EXTD SUR.
Switches between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback of
multi-channel sources (see page 84).
P SELECT
Selects decoders for 2-channel sources (see pages 84 and
85).
Q ENHANCER
Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
(see page 54).
R NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 55).
S RENAME
Changes the name of the input source in the display
window (see page 123).
T CLEAR
Clears remote control functions acquired from the learn,
macro and/or rename features (see page 127).
U LEARN
Programs remote control codes of functions from other
remote controls (see page 122).
9 En
INTRODUCTION
NET RADIO
Selects the Internet radio as the sub input source of
NET/USB.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control
This section describes the function of each control on the
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control used to control the amplifier
functions of Zone 2 or Zone 3.
See the following pages for details about other controls
and functions.
1 Input selector buttons
Select the desired input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3.
• AM/FM tuning ........................................ see page 56
• XM Satellite Radio tuning ...................... see page 64
3 POWER
Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3.
2 ID1/ID2 switch
Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2
(see page 121).
Note
3
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
4
4 STANDBY
Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode.
POWER
CD
TUNER
1
DTV
STANDBY
CD-R
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE NET/USB
Note
VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX/DOCK
DVD
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
PRESET
VOLUME
5
5 VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
MUTE
6
6 MUTE
Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press again to
restore the audio output to the previous volume level.
A/B/C/D/E
7 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch
Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that
of Zone 3.
ID1 ID2
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
2
7
(U.S.A. model)
10 En
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Preparing the remote control
Notes
2
1
3
1
Press the
part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2
Insert the four supplied batteries
(AAA, LR03) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3
Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
■ Installing batteries in the Zone 2/Zone 3
remote control
1
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
– the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes
dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• We strongly recommend using alkaline batteries.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code
and program any acquired functions that may have been
cleared.
■ Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
Remote control sensor
3
2
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
1
Take off the battery compartment cover.
2
Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, LR03)
according to the polarity markings
(+ and –) on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3
Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
30
30
Notes
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
11 En
INTRODUCTION
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel display
Note
The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when
“XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 67.
1
2 3
RECOUT
4
NET/USB
V-AUX
DOCK
5
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1 CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
6
CD-R
CD
PHONO
7
MULTI CH
TUNER XM
neural
VIRTUAL HiFi DSP
YPAO ENHANCER SILENT
DSD
PCM
WMA
A
B
C
D
E
F
DIGITAL
PL x
EX
MP3
dB
VOLUME MUTE
96/24
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
CINEMA
MATRIX DISCRETE
96
24
8
neural
DSD
PCM
WMA
VIRTUAL HiFi DSP
YPAO ENHANCER SILENT
CINEMA
DIGITAL
PL x
EX MATRIX
DISCRETE
MP3
G
96
24
9
H
I
0
L
M
N
O
P
J
K
TUNED STEREO
AUTO MEMORY
PS
ZONE2 PTY
ZONE3 RT
NIGHT CT
SLEEP EON
PTY HOLD
TUNED STEREO
AUTO MEMORY
PS
ZONE2 PTY
ZONE3 RT
NIGHT CT
SLEEP EON
PTY HOLD
A ........ U.S.A. and Canada models only
P ........ U.K. and Europe models only
1 HDMI indicator
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is
input at HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 jacks
(see page 21).
2 RECOUT indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the recording input source
selecting mode (see page 83).
8 Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
9 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
0 Input channel and speaker indicators
Presence speaker indicators
3 DOCK indicator
Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit
(see page 29).
L C R
LFE SL SB SR
Presence and surround back speaker
indicators
Light up according to the number of presence and
surround back speakers set for “Presence” (see
page 106) and “Surround Back” (see page 106) in
“Speaker Set” when “Test Tone” in “Basic” is set to
“ON” (see page 105).
5 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
7 MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 43).
12 En
Surround back speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
4 Battery charge indicator
Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the
stationed iPod in the standby mode of this unit (see
page 75).
6 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
Input channel indicators
y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back
speakers automatically by running “Auto Setup” (see page 35) or
manually by adjusting settings for “Presence” (see page 106) and
“Surround Back” (see page 106) in “Speaker Set”.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
B DSP indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP
sound field programs are selected.
CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound
field program (see page 47).
HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program (see page 47).
C VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 51).
D YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run “Auto Setup” and when the
speaker settings set in “Auto Setup” are used without any
modifications (see page 35).
E ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
turned on (see page 54).
F Signal format indicators
The respective indicator lights up when this unit is
reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital), PCM (Pulse
Code Modulation), WMA (Windows Media Audio), WAV
(RIFF Wave Form Audio) or MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer3) audio signals.
G Dolby decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the Dolby
decoders of this unit function.
H Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Surround left
DSP sound field
Surround right
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
I Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 43).
J SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 51).
K DTS decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the DTS
decoders of this unit function.
L Tuner indicators
Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite
Radio tuning mode.
TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station
(see page 56).
STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal
for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator
is lit (see page 56).
AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning
mode (see page 56).
MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show that a station can be stored
(see page 59).
M ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators
Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on
(see page 131).
N NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode
(see page 55).
O SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 45).
P Radio Data System indicators
(U.K. and Europe models only)
PS, PTY, RT and CT
Light up according to the selected Radio Data System
display mode.
EON
Lights up when the EON data service is being
received.
PTY HOLD
Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
13 En
INTRODUCTION
A neural indicator
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Lights up when the Neural Surround decoder is activated
(see page 85).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Rear panel
1
MONITOR OUT
2
3
COMPONENT VIDEO
A DVD
B DTV C CBL/SAT
Y
4
VIDEO
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
IN
OUT
IN
6
7
ANTENNA
MONITOR OUT
DVR/VCR 2 OUT
GND
FM
Y
5
AC IN
AM
S VIDEO
PB
PB
PR
PR
IN
(PLAY)
HDMI
VIDEO
OUT
(REC)
R
MD/
+
SPEAKERS
SP1
+
PRESENCE
L
WRENCH
HOLDER
L
TAPE
IN3
REMOTE
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
1
2
R
CBL/
SAT
GND
PHONO
IN2
L
DTV
R
CD-R
CD
CENTER
FRONT(6CH) SURROUND
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SINGLE(SB)
ZONE 2
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
+
ZONE
ZONE 3
VIDEO
SINGLE
CENTER
+
+
AC OUTLETS
R
IN(PLAY)
IN1
OUT(REC)
AUDIO
SUB
WOOFER
WOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
DOCK
+
+
SURROUND
L
SUR.BACK/
SUB
SB(8CH)
R
PRESENCE
PRE OUT
SP2
L
ZONE OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
+
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
1 CD
OUT
2 DVD
DVR/
3 VCR2
4 CD
5 DVD
6 DTV
7
CBL/
SAT
8
MD/
TAPE
R
+
+
FRONT
L
9 CD-R
NETWORK
1
8 9 0 A
B
C
2
CONTROL OUT
RS-232C
D
E
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
F
FRONT(6CH) SURROUND
SB(8CH)
MULTI CH INPUT
G
1 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
See pages 23 and 24 for connection information.
20 Audio component jacks
See page 26 for connection information.
3 Video component jacks
See pages 23 and 24 for connection information.
4 ANTENNA terminals
See page 31 for connection information.
5 WRENCH HOLDER
Use to hook the supplied speaker terminal wrench when
not in use (see page 18).
6 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
See page 32 for details.
7 AC IN/OUTLET(S)
See page 32 for connection information.
8 HDMI connectors
See page 21 for connection information.
9 REMOTE jacks
See page 130 for details.
A DOCK terminal
See page 29 for connection information.
14 En
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND SINGLE(SB)
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
(U.S.A. model)
ZONE
VIDEO
SUR.BACK/
SUB
WOOFER
PRESENCE
PRE OUT
H
ZONE OUT
I
B NETWORK port
Use to connect a network cable for network connections.
See page 30 for connection information.
C XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
See page 63 for connection information.
D DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks
See page 24 for connection information.
E CONTROL OUT jack
This is a control expansion terminal for custom
installation.
F RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only.
Consult your dealer for details.
G Speaker terminals
See page 16 for connection information.
H MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 28 for connection information.
I PRE OUT jacks
See page 27 for connection information.
J ZONE OUT jacks
See page 130 for connection information.
CONNECTIONS
CONNECTIONS
Placing speakers
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we
recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
PL
PR
FR
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Place the
center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as
close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or
under it.
30˚
SL
SR
60˚
80˚
SL
SR
SBL
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
SBR
30 cm (12 in) or more
Surround back left and right speakers
(SBL and SBR)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the
listening position and at the same height as the surround
speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)
apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width
as that of the front speakers.
PR
FR
PL
SW
FL
SR
SBR
C
SBL
SL
1.8 m (6 ft)
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
PL
PR
FR
FL
C
1.8 m (6 ft)
Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front
speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA
DSP (see page 153). These effects include sounds that
filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the
screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place
these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 to 1 m (1
to 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inward,
and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass
frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high
fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS
sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical,
because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it
is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers.
Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce
wall reflections.
15 En
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
C
FL
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
CONNECTIONS
Connecting speakers
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be
unnatural and lack bass.
CAUTION
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 34).
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this
unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the
monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor.
• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit
(see page 33). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 135).
Notes
• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the
plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
• The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” or to “None” in “Speaker Set” (see pages 105 and 106) are directed to the
speakers selected in “Bass Out” (see page 107).
• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. You can set
to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PR/SB Priority” parameter in “Audio Option” (see page 101).
• You can use the PRESENCE terminals to connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers as well as the presence speakers (see page 130).
Subwoofer
Surround back speakers
Left
Right
Presence speakers
Left
Right
Center speaker
R
+
+
R
+
SP1
SPEAKERS
+
PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
SINGLE
SURROUND
L
CENTER
+
+
L
SUB
WOOFER
+
R
SP2
L
PRE OUT
+
R
+
FRONT
+
L
(U.S.A. model)
Zone 2 or Zone 3
speakers
(see page 130)
Left
Right
Surround speakers
Left
Right
Front speakers
16 En
CONNECTIONS
FRONT terminals
Connect front left and right speakers to these terminals.
CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker to these terminals.
■ Connecting the speaker cable
1
SURROUND terminals
Connect surround left and right speakers to these
terminals.
Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist the exposed wires of the
cable together to prevent short circuits.
10 mm (0.4 in)
Note
When you use a surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the
left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE).
2
PRESENCE terminals
Connect presence left and right speakers to these
terminals.
Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker
terminal wrench.
Speaker terminal wrench
SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System)
to this jack.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
3
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
4
Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the
supplied speaker terminal wrench.
17 En
PREPARATION
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect surround back left and right speakers to these
terminals.
CONNECTIONS
5
Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto the
WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this
unit when not in use.
■ Connecting the banana plug
(except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea
models)
The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector
widely used to terminate speaker cables.
Banana plug
■ Connecting to the SP2 speaker
terminals
1
Connect Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to these terminals (see
page 130).
1
Tighten the knob using the supplied speaker
terminal wrench.
Speaker terminal wrench
Open the tab.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
2
2
Insert the banana plug connector into the
end of the corresponding terminal.
Insert one bare wire into the hole on the
terminal.
y
3
Close the tab to secure the wire.
18 En
You can also use the banana plug with the SP2 speaker terminals.
Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the hole on the
terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the banana plug.
CONNECTIONS
Using bi-amplification connections
■ Bi-amplification connection
To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT
and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To
activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP”
to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 136).
This unit
+
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
+
FRONT
SINGLE
PREPARATION
Some of the speakers have speaker wire connections that
allow bi-amplification to enhance the performance of the
speaker system. This unit allows you to make biamplification connection to one speaker system. Check if
your speakers support bi-amplification. As these speakers
are shipped to you, you will note shorting bars or bridges,
one connecting the two red input terminals and the other
connecting the two black input terminals. Remove these
shorting bars or bridges only if you plan to bi-amplify
your speakers.
+
■ Conventional connection
If you want to connect your speakers as traditional
loudspeakers using the conventional connection method,
connect your speakers using the regular left and right
speaker wire connections and ignore the second set of
terminals.
R
+
L
This unit
R
+
+
FRONT
L
Right
Left
Front speakers
Note
Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low
pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.
Right
Left
Front speakers
Shorting bars
or bridges
Shorting bars
or bridges
19 En
CONNECTIONS
Information on jacks and cable plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs
DIGITAL
DIGITAL
L
R
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
(White)
(Red)
(Orange)
L
R
C
AUDIO
Left and right
Coaxial
analog audio digital audio
cable plugs
cable plug
Video jacks and cable plugs
VIDEO
S VIDEO
(Yellow)
O
V
S
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
(Green)
(Blue)
(Red)
Y
PB
PR
Component
video cable
plugs
■ Audio jacks
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
Note
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are
compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
20 En
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
y
This unit equips the video conversion function. See pages 22 and
102 for details.
CONNECTIONS
Information on HDMI
This unit has the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3 and HDMI OUT jacks for digital audio and video signal input/
output. Connect the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 jack of this unit to the HDMI output jack of other HDMI
components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack of other HDMI
components (such as a TV and a projector).
The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 jack of the selected input source are
output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.
Note
■ HDMI compatibility with this unit
Audio signal
types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible
HDMI
components
2ch Linear
PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch
Linear PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, etc.
DSD
2/5.1ch,
2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
SACD, etc.
Bitstream
Dolby Digital,
DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
PREPARATION
You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 117).
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
HDMI
HDMI cable plug
This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following
standards:
• HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia
Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by
HDMI Licensing, LLC.
• HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed
by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
Notes
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video
and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of
the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
y
• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16
feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
Notes
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of
the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of
this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt
playback or cause noise.
• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1,
HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 of this unit cannot be digitally
output at the HDMI OUT jack.
• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the
HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to
establish the connection to the component.
• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video
and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be
output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “Conversion” to “On” in
“Video” (see page 102) to activate this feature.
21 En
CONNECTIONS
Audio and video signal flow
■ Audio signal flow
Input
■ Video signal flow
Input
Output
Output
HDMI
HDMI
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
S VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO
Digital output
Through
Analog output
Video conversion (see page 102)
Notes
Component interlace/progressive
up-conversion (see page 102)
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN
3 jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when
“Support Audio” is set to “Other” (see page 115).
• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the
analog AUDIO OUT and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
HDMI interlace/progressive
up-conversion and resolution upscaling (see page 102)
Notes
• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT
VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the
input signals is as follows:
1. COMPONENT VIDEO
2. S VIDEO
3. VIDEO
• The analog video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks can be deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to
480p/576p. Set “Component I/P” to “On” in “Video” to activate
this feature (see page 102).
• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN
3 jack cannot be output to analog video output jacks.
• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i
(PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite
video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 102) and
HDMI up-scaling (see page 102) are available only when
“Conversion” is set to “On” (see page 102).
• Use the “HDMI Up-Scaling” parameter in “Video” to
deinterlace and convert the resolution of the analog video
signals output at the HDMI OUT jack (see page 102).
• The GUI screen signal is not output at the VCR 1 OUT and
DVR/VCR 2 OUT jacks and is not recorded.
22 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
y
Notes
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they
are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.
• Set “Conversion” in “Video” to “On” (see page 102) to display the short message displays.
• Set “Wall Paper” in “Video” to “Yes” or “Gray” (see page 104) to display the parameter displays.
• The GUI screen appears with the wall paper or gray background depending on the input video signal format and the setting of the
parameters in “Wall Paper” (see page 104).
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
MONITOR OUT
Y
S VIDEO
PB
VIDEO
HDMI
PR
OUT
(U.S.A. model)
Y
PB
V
PR
Component video in
S
Video in
S-video in
HDMI in
TV
(or projector)
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
23 En
PREPARATION
You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the
rear panel of this unit. Use the “Support Audio” parameter in “Option” to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals (see
page 115).
CONNECTIONS
Connecting other components
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
Notes
• When “Conversion” is set to “Off” (see page 102), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see
page 23). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to
the VIDEO jacks.
• When “Conversion” is set to “On” (see page 102), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When
recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “Option”, “Optical Output”, or “Coaxial Input” in “I/O Assignment” (see
page 96).
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is
given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
• The short message display does not appear when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input.
• The short message display does not appear when the component video signals with 480p/576p resolutions are input and output at the
VIDEO or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack.
■ Connecting a DVD player
DVD player
HDMI out
Optical out
Coaxial out
Audio out
Component out
S-video out
C
PR
PB
Y
Video out
S
COMPONENT VIDEO
A DVD
R
V
VIDEO
DVD
Y
PB
HDMI
PR
L
R
IN1
DIGITAL INPUT
DVD
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
2 DVD
5 DVD
(U.S.A. model)
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
24 En
L
O
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
Note
*1
When you connect another VCR to this unit, connect it to the VCR 1 terminals (S VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN, AUDIO IN, S VIDEO
OUT, VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks) same as DVR/VCR 2 terminals except the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
*1
VIDEO
VCR 1
IN
OUT
IN
DVR/VCR 2 OUT
L
PREPARATION
R
IN DVR/VCR 2 OUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
DVR/
3 VCR2
R
L
V
S-video in
R
L
Video in
V
Audio in
S
Audio out
Video out
C
S-video out
Coaxial out
(U.S.A. model)
9 CD-R
S
DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
■ Connecting set-top boxes
Satellite receiver,
cable TV receiver
HDTV decoder
Component out
Component out
S
S
COMPONENT VIDEO
DTV
V
L
R
Audio out
V
Video out
L
S-video out
R
S-video out
O
Video out
Y
Audio out
PB
Optical out
Optical out
HDMI out
PR
HDMI out
O
PR
PB
Y
VIDEO
DTV
CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT
Y
PB
HDMI
PR
L
IN3
R
CBL/
SAT
IN2
DTV
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
6 DTV
7
CBL/
SAT
(U.S.A. model)
25 En
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting audio components
Notes
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to either the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “Option”, “Optical Output”, or “Coaxial Input” in “I/O Assignment”
(see page 96).
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some turntables.
• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a lowoutput MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.
• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component,
the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
Audio out
Optical in
L
O
R
Audio in
CD recorder
L
R
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
MD/
L
TAPE
R
GND
PHONO
CD-R
CD
L
R
IN(PLAY)
OUT(REC)
AUDIO
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
1 CD
8
4 CD
MD/
TAPE
9 CD-R
(U.S.A. model)
R
Ground
Audio out
L
R
L
O
C
Audio
out
Coaxial
out
R
Optical
out
L
R
Audio
out
O
L
Audio
in
Optical in
Turntable
26 En
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting an external amplifier
This unit has more than enough power for any home use.
However, if you want to add more power to the speaker
output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an
external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks.
Notes
1
2
CENTER
FRONT
3
PREPARATION
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not
make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.
• The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE
OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see
page 52).
• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer (see page 53).
• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT jack depending on the settings for “Speaker Set” (see
page 105) and “Bass Out” (see page 107).
4
SURROUND SINGLE(SB)
L
R
SUR.BACK/
SUB
WOOFER
PRESENCE
PRE OUT
5
1 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack.
2 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel output jacks.
3 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel output jacks.
4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT
jacks
Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When
you only connect one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack.
y
• Set the “Surround Back” to “Large x2”, “Large x1”, “Small x2”
or “Small x1” and “Presence” to “None” (see page 106) to
output the surround back channel signals at SURROUND
BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.
• Set the “Presence” to “Yes” and “Surround Back” to “None”
(see page 106) to output the presence channel signals at
SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.
5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.
27 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or
pre-amplifier.
If you set “Input Channels” to “8ch” in “MULTI CH” (see page 97), you can use the input jacks assigned as “Front
Input” in “Multi CH Assign” (see page 97) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
Notes
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 43), this unit automatically
turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
For 6-channel input
For 8-channel input
(REC)
(PLAY)
CENTER
FRONT(6CH) SURROUND
MD/
L
TAPE
L
*1
UT
R
R
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
FRONT(6CH) SURROUND
SB(8CH)
L
CENTER
L
MULTI CH INPUT
L
R
R
R
SUB
SB(8CH)
WOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
R
L
R
L
R
Front out
Center out
Subwoofer
out
Surround out
L
Surround back out
Surround
out
Front out
Center out
Subwoofer
out
SUB
WOOFER
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Note
*1
28 En
The analog audio input jacks assigned as “Front Input” in
“Multi CH Assign” (see page 97).
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
CAUTION
Do not connect this unit to the AC power supply
until all connections between components are
complete.
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit.
CAUTION
Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and
other components before making connections.
Note
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
(U.S.A. model)
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
TONE
CONTROL
AUDIO
SELECT
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE CONTROLS
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
S VIDEO
VIDEO
L
S
V
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
R
O
DOCK
YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10,
sold separately)
S-Video
output
Video
output
Audio
output
Optical
output
Game console or
video camera
29 En
PREPARATION
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear
panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)
where you can station your iPod and control playback of
your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold
separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this
unit using its dedicated cable.
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the network
To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the
NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this
unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and YAMAHA
MCX-2000 or access the Internet Radio, each device must be connected properly in the network.
Note
If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 109).
YAMAHA MCX-2000
YAMAHA MCX-C15
Internet
YAMAHA MCX-A10
(with optional
speakers)
WAN
LAN
Modem
Router
Network cable
NETWORK
30 En
PC
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated
terminals. In general, these antennas should provide
sufficient signal strength.
2
Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT
terminal.
3
Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires
into the AM ANT terminal.
4
Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal.
5
Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the
other lead wire to the GND terminal.
Notes
Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)
AM loop
antenna
(supplied)
ANTENNA
FM
GND
AM
(U.S.A. model)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16.4 to 32.8
ft) vinyl-covered wire
extended outdoors from a
window.
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the
antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.
y
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1
Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to
this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception
when you tune into AM stations (see page 56).
Set up the AM loop antenna.
31 En
PREPARATION
• Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (Asia and General
models only) according to the frequency spacing in your area
(see page 136).
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
CONNECTIONS
Connecting the power cable
■ Connecting the AC power cable
CAUTION
Use the supplied AC cable. Do not use other AC power cables as doing so may result in fire or
electrical shock.
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the AC power
cable into an AC wall outlet.
(U.S.A. model)
AC IN
To the AC wall outlet
AC OUTLETS
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
CAUTION
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of
this unit must be set for your local voltage
BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE
SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and
create a potential fire hazard.
Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or
counterclockwise to the correct position using a
straight slot screwdriver.
Voltages are as follows:
..............................110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
230240V
32 En
Voltage indication
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet
Korea model............................................................... None
Other models......................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to
these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For
information on the maximum power or the total power
consumption of the components that can be connected to
these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 155.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
CONNECTIONS
Setting the speaker impedance
CAUTION
4
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER
IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this
unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the
front speakers.
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel
repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
(U.S.A. model)
PREPARATION
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
TONE
CONTROL
AUDIO
SELECT
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
SPEAKER IMP.
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
6 MIN
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
2,5
1
3
5
2,4
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and turn off this unit.
Make sure this unit is turned off.
See page 34 for details about turning on or off this
unit.
MASTER
2
Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel
and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to
the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
STRAIGHT
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
While holding
down
EFFECT
3
Note
MASTER
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select “SPEAKER IMP.”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
PROGRAM
SPEAKER IMP.
8 MIN
33 En
CONNECTIONS
Turning on and off the power
When all connections are complete, turn on this unit.
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
STANDBY
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
POWER
POWER
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
VOLUME
PHONO
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
PHONES
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
OPTICAL
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
MASTER ON/OFF
■ Turning on this unit
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
inward to the ON position to turn on this
unit.
When you turns on this unit by pressing MASTER ON/
OFF, the main zone is turned on.
■ Turning on the main zone from the
standby mode
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel (or POWER on the remote control) to
turn on the main zone.
MAIN ZONE
POWER
ON/OFF
or
MASTER
Front panel
■ Turning off this unit
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
again to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.
Front panel
Remote control
■ Set the main zone to the standby mode
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel (or STANDBY on the remote control)
to set the main zone to the standby mode.
MAIN ZONE
STANDBY
MASTER
ON/OFF
or
Front panel
Notes
• MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER
and STANDBY on the remote control are operational only
when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.
• As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this
unit.
34 En
Front panel
Remote control
AUTO SETUP
AUTO SETUP
This unit employs the YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
Using Auto Setup
1
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
(U.S.A. model)
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
Notes
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
• Connect a video monitor to run “Auto Setup” (see page 23).
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the “Auto Setup” procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as
possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is in progress. If
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
OPTICAL
USB
Omni-directional
microphone
y
• If an error occurs during the “Auto Setup” procedure and an
error or warning message appears in the GUI screen or in the
front panel display, see the “Auto Setup” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on pages 147 and 148 for a complete
list of error and warning messages and proper remedies.
• The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold.
• If the volume level and the crossover frequency of your
subwoofer can be adjusted, set the volume level to about half
way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the
maximum.
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
SOURCE
TV MUTE
LEVEL
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
RETURN
MEMORY
Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
Optimizer microphone
4
TV
MUTE
SET MENU
TITLE
2
4,13
5-12
DISPLAY
EFFECT
(U.S.A. model)
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be
when you are seated in your listening position. You can use a 6
mm diameter screw to fix the optimizer microphone to a tripod
(etc.).
35 En
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Once you have connected the supplied optimizer
microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel and have placed it in a suitable location in your
listening room, run “Auto Setup” in the GUI screen.
AUTO SETUP
3
4
Make sure of the following check points
before starting the Auto Setup operations.
• Speakers are connected appropriately.
• Supplied optimizer microphone is connected to this
unit and placed appropriately.
• Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
• The room is sufficiently quiet.
• The video monitor connected to this unit is turned on.
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU to turn on the GUI
screen.
The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.
6
Press h to enter “Setup Menu”.
Skip
Wiring
Check
Distance
Size
7
AMP
Press k / n repeatedly to select “Wiring”,
“Distance”, “Size”, “Equalizing”, or “Level”,
and then press h to set the selected
parameter.
SET MENU
SOURCE
MENU
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
TV
ENTER
Currently
selected menu
item
Stereo/Surround
Sound
Input Select
Video
Manual Setup
Basic
Auto Setup
NET/USB
System Memory
Option
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
8
A/B/C/D/E
Press k / n repeatedly to select the desired
parameter and then ENTER to confirm the
selection.
\
5
Press k / n repeatedly and then h to select
“Auto Setup”.
“Setup Menu” is selected as the currently selected
menu item.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Input Select
Manual Setup
Information
Auto Setup
Setup Menu
System Memory
Start
Signal Info.
Information
Setup Menu
Wiring
Start
Distance
Size
36 En
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
AUTO SETUP
9
Skip
Wiring
Check
Distance
Size
Wiring
Skip
Distance
Check
Size
Equalizing
Wiring
Distance
Skip
Size
Check
Equalizing
Level
Distance
Size
Skip
Equalizing
Check: Natural
Level
Check: Flat
Check: Front
Size
Equalizing
Skip
Level
Check
Level (Volume level)
Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.
Choices: Check, Skip
• Select “Check” to automatically check and adjust
this item.
• Select “Skip” to skip this item and perform no
adjustments.
This unit performs the following checks:
Wiring (Speaker wiring)
Checks which speakers are connected and the
polarity of each speaker.
Distance (Speaker distance)
Checks the distance of each speaker from the
listening position and adjusts the timing of each
channel.
Size (Speaker size)
Checks the frequency response of each speaker and
sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each
channel.
10
Once you have selected the desired settings
of each parameter, press l to return to the
previous menu level and then press n to
select “Start”.
Information
Setup Menu
Start
Start: ENTER
Choices: Check, Skip
• Select “Check” to automatically check and adjust
the item.
• Select “Skip” to skip the item and perform no
adjustments.
37 En
PREPARATION
Equalizing (Parametric equalizer level)
Adjusts the frequency and the parametric equalizer
level of each channel to reduce coloration across the
channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is
particularly important if you use different brands or
sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room
with unique sonic characteristics. In addition, the
frequency response of each channel is adjusted in
accordance with the sound output from your front
speakers.
Choices: Check:Natural, Check:Flat, Check:Front,
Skip
• Select “Check:Natural” to average out the
frequency response of all speakers with higher
frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended
if the “Check:Flat” setting sounds a little harsh.
• Select “Check:Flat” to average the frequency
response of all speakers. Recommended if all of
your speakers are of similar quality.
• Select “Check:Front” to adjust the frequency
response of each speaker in accordance with the
sound of your front speakers. Recommended if
your front speakers are of much higher quality than
your other speakers.
• Select “Skip” to skip the selected item and perform
no adjustments.
Repeat steps 7 and 8 until you set all the
desired parameters.
AUTO SETUP
y
11
If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually
adjust each parameter, set the parameters in “Basic” (see
page 104).
Press ENTER to start the setup procedure.
This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test
tones are output from each speaker during the auto
setup procedure. During the setup procedure,
“Measuring...” appears in the GUI screen. We
recommend getting out of the room while thus unit is
in the auto setup procedure. The necessary time for
the auto setup procedure depends on the environment
of the listening room and connected speaker (from 30
seconds to 3 minutes).
Notes
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of
your listening environment, run “Auto Setup” again to
recalibrate your system.
• The distances displayed in the “Distance” results may be
longer than the actual distance depending on the
characteristics of your subwoofer.
• In the “Equalizing” results, different values may be set for
the same band to provide finer adjustments.
PRESET/CH
13
ENTER
Press SET MENU to exit from the GUI screen.
A/B/C/D/E
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
y
Notes
• To stop the Auto Setup procedure and set this unit to the
pause mode, press one of the cursor buttons (k / n / l /
h) or ENTER. In the pause mode, press k to retry the
procedure, and l to cancel the Auto Setup procedure.
• If an error message appears and this unit stops the setup
procedure, see the “Auto Setup” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 147, and after carrying
out the remedy, retry the Auto Setup procedure.
12
Once all items are set successfully, following
display appears in the GUI screen.
Equalizing
Level
Result
Exit
Retry
Detail
Setup
Measurement Over
Successfully
• Press n and select “Setup” to set the measured
values.
• Press k and select “Retry” to retry the Auto Setup
procedure.
• Press h and select “Detail” to view information
about measurement results and warning messages.
For more details about warning messages, see the
“Auto Setup” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING”
on page 147.
• Press l and select “Exit” to exit from the Auto
Setup procedure. If you select “Exit”, “Don’t
Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured
values and exit, select “Yes”. To cancel the settings
and exit, select “No”.
38 En
• After you have completed the “Auto Setup” procedure, be
sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone.
• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it
away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this
unit.
■ Reviewing the result of the auto setup
Use this feature to review the result of the auto setup.
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU to turn on the GUI
screen.
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
MENU
SRCH MODE
TV
Stereo/Surround
Sound
Input Select
Video
Manual Setup
Basic
Auto Setup
NET/USB
System Memory
Option
AUTO SETUP
2
Press k / n repeatedly and then h to select
“Auto Setup”.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Note
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
“---” appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel.
Distance (Speaker distance)
Displays the speaker distance from the listening
position. Press l / h to switch the unit to display the
value of the each speaker distance.
Press k to select “Information”.
Note
4
Information
Wiring
Setup Menu
Distance
Start
Size
“---” appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel.
Press h and then n repeatedly to select the
desired check items.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ENTER
Size (Speaker size)
Displays the size of the connected speakers. The bass
cross over frequency (“Cross”) appears at the bottom
of the menu area.
• “LRG” appears when the connected speaker has
the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals
effectively.
• “SML” appears when the connected speaker does
not have the ability to reproduce the low-frequency
signals effectively.
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Note
Wiring
Distance
Size
Right
Left
NRM
Front
NRM
Center
NRM
Sur.
NRM
NRM
S.Back NRM
NRM
PRNS
NRM
NRM
SubWfr
NRM
Reload:ENTER
“---” appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel.
Equalizing (Speaker equalizing)
Displays the result of the adjustment of the frequency
responses of each connected speaker.
Note
Gray line appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel.
Level (speaker level)
Displays the speaker output level of the connected
speakers.
Note
Gray line appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel.
39 En
PREPARATION
3
Wiring (Speaker wiring)
Displays the polarity of each connected speaker.
• “NRM” appears when the polarity of the connected
speaker is normal.
• “REV” appears when the polarity of the connected
speaker is reversed.
PLAYBACK
PLAYBACK
CAUTION
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the
sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.
y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set “Decoder Mode” in “Input Select” to “DTS” before the playback
(see page 96).
Basic procedure
2
(U.S.A. model)
PURE DIRECT
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the operation mode selector to AMP
and then press one of the input selector
buttons on the remote control) to select the
desired input source.
VOLUME
TONE
CONTROL
AUDIO
SELECT
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
INPUT
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE CONTROLS
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
PHONES
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
2
5
Front panel
4
or
TV MUTE
POWER
TV
POWER
STANDBY
POWER
LEVEL
AV
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
TITLE
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
PURE DIRECT
NET/USB
MENU
SRCH MODE
BAND
SLEEP
MUTE
SET MENU
AMP
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
DTV
VCR 1
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
2
+
+
+
2
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
TV VOL
CH
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
2
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
NET RADIO
USB
NIGHT
ENHANCER
+ 10
ENT
MODE
VOLUME
TV
4
PC/MCX
OFF
ON
MACRO LEARN
TV
DTV
MULTI CH IN
CLEAR
RENAME
Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
VCR 1
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display and in the short
message display for a few seconds.
(U.S.A. model)
1
CD
MD/TAPE
Remote control
PTY SEEK START
REC
SOURCE
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
EFFECT
MEMORY
CLASSICAL
1 MEMORY
AMP
SOURCE
DISPLAY
RETURN
5
SELECT
PHONO
AUDIO
ENTER
Available input sources
NET/USB
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1 CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
INPUT:
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
TUNER
DVD
y
Currently selected input source
• You can control this unit by using the graphical user
interface (GUI) screen. See page 44 for details.
• You can turn on or off the short message displays on the
video monitor. See page 103 for details.
Note
For details about controlling XM Satellite Radio when
“XM” is selected as the input source, see page 67.
40 En
PLAYBACK
3
4
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
• See page 56 for details about tuning instructions.
• See page 67 for details about XM Satellite Radio
tuning instructions.
Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust
the volume to the desired output level.
Note
Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer
mode cannot be selected when the component connected to
the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source
(see page 43) and Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG” (see page 42).
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically
selects the last sound field program used with the
corresponding input source.
■ Guide to contents
VOLUME
+
or
When you want to...
VOLUME
–
52
Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers
52
Enjoy the compressed music sources in enhanced
sound
54
y
Edit parameters of sound field programs
88
See page 53 to adjust the level of each speaker.
Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at
night
55
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel (or press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote
control repeatedly) to select the desired
sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display and in the short message
display. See page 47 for details about sound field
programs.
Use headphones
43
Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo
53
Select a decoder to play back sources with
84
Set this unit to the standby mode automatically
45
Remote control
or
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
STEREO
PROGRAM
Front panel
5
Remote control
Currently selected sound field program category
MOVIE
Sci-Fi
Currently selected sound field program
41 En
BASIC
OPERATION
Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound
Front panel
5
See
page
PLAYBACK
AUTO
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this
feature (Audio input jack select) to switch the input jack
assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are
assigned to an input source.
y
• We recommend setting Audio input jack select to “AUTO” in
most cases.
• You can adjust the default Audio input jack select of this unit by
using “Audio Select” in “Option” (see page 114).
• You can also set Audio input jack select setting in “Audio
Select” in “Input Select” (see page 96).
1
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the desired
input source.
INPUT
PHONO
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
or
DTV
Front panel
2
VCR 1
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
Remote control
Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel (or
AUDIO SEL on the remote control) repeatedly
to select the desired Audio input jack select
setting.
AUDIO
SELECT
AUDIO SEL
or
Available input sources
NET/USB
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1 CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
A.SEL:
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
TUNER
AUTO
Currently selected
Audio input jack
select setting
42 En
Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
(1)HDMI
(2)Digital signals
(3)Analog signals
HDMI
Selects only HDMI signals. When
HDMI signals are not input, no sound
is output.
COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
(1)Digital signals input at the
COAXIAL jack.
(2)Digital signals input at the
OPTICAL jack.
When no signals are input, no sound is
output.
ANALOG
Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
Note
This feature is not available when no digital input jack
(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. Use “I/O
Assignment” in “Input Select” to reassign the respective
input jack (see page 96).
PLAYBACK
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 28) as the input
source.
Using your headphones
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
Rotate the input selector on the front panel to
select MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control).
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
INPUT
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
INPUT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
S VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
PHONES
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
OPTICAL
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel
Remote control
Use “MULTI CH” menu in “Input Select” to set the parameters
for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 97).
y
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode
activates automatically (see page 51).
Note
Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI
CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 46) and
Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 42).
Notes
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• When headphones are used, only front L/R channel signals are
output.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
Muting the audio output
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the
audio output.
MUTE
y
• You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio
output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “Muting Type”
parameter in “Sound” (see page 100).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
43 En
BASIC
OPERATION
y
PLAYBACK
Operating the amplifier functions of this unit by using the graphical user
interface (GUI) screen
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) screen that helps you to control the amplifier function of
this unit. With the GUI screen, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. You can
also set up this unit using the GUI screen (see page 87).
■ Items in GUI screen
Currently selected
decoder
Currently selected
input source
Currently selected
menu item
DVD
Pro Logic
Stereo/Surround
Sound
Input Select
Video
Manual Setup
Basic
Auto Setup
NET/USB
System Memory
Option
Sci-Fi
Currently selected
sound field program
Menu area
Manual Setup
-40.0dB
Current menu directory
Volume level
(see page 41)
y
• Set the operation mode selector to AMP when you operate this unit by using GUI screen.
• See page 87 for details about the contents in the menu area.
• This unit reserves the previously selected GUI screen.
■ Basic controls in the GUI screen
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
SOURCE
–
TV MUTE
1
LEVEL
–
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
–
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
4
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
44 En
3
AUDIO
ENTER
RETURN
2 Cursor l
Press to return to the previous menu level.
MUTE
SET MENU
TITLE
2
Set to AMP
TV
DISPLAY
EFFECT
1 ENTER
Press to select the currently selected menu item and move
to the next menu level.
5
3 SET MENU
Press to display or turn off the GUI screen.
4 Cursor k / n
Press to select the item in the current menu level.
5 Cursor h
Press to select the currently selected menu item and move
to the next menu level.
PLAYBACK
Playing video sources in the
background of an audio source
3
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press SLEEP on the remote control
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
SLEEP
Press the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source and then an
audio source.
SLEEP 120min.
SLEEP OFF
SLEEP 90min.
SLEEP 30min.
SLEEP 60min.
NET/USB
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
DTV
VCR 1
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching
the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep
timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front
panel display, and the display returns to the selected
sound field program.
Audio sources
SLEEP
120min.
SLEEP
y
Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the
desired setting to select the default background video input source
of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 97).
Flashes
Using the sleep timer
Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 32).
1
Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the desired input
source.
STRAIGHT
Analog
SLEEP
Lights up
■ Canceling the sleep timer
Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly
until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel
display.
SLEEP
NET/USB
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
DTV
2
VCR 1
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
See page 56 for details about tuning instructions.
SLEEP
OFF
Disappears
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”
disappears from the front panel display after a few
seconds.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on
the front panel) to set the main zone to the standby mode.
45 En
BASIC
OPERATION
Video sources
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
• When you set the “Decoder Mode” parameter in “Input Select” to “Auto”, this unit selects the appropriate digital decoder according to
the input signal.
• The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources.
• The YAMAHA HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from
the front, back, left and right.
• You can select sound field programs and adjust the parameters by using the GUI screen. See page 88 for details.
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source (see page 43) and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 42).
• When you play back DSD sources with any sound field program, this unit converts the DSD signals to PCM signals and then applies
the selected program.
• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field program, this unit applies the selected program without activating the
DTS 96/24 decoder.
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to 48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.
y
You can select the desired sound field programs and setting the parameters by using GUI screen. see page 88 for details.
■ Front panel operations
■ Remote control operations
(U.S.A. model)
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
AMP
SOURCE
PURE DIRECT
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
TV
MUTE
VOLUME
LEVEL
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
AUDIO
ENTER
OPTICAL
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
VIDEO AUX
USB
ON
OFF
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
MEMORY
MASTER
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
PROGRAM selector
1 MEMORY
9
MOVIE
6
7
8
2
NIGHT
ENHANCER
0
+ 10
ENT
Sound field program
selector buttons
(U.S.A. model)
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the short message display.
46 En
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then
press one of the sound field program selector
buttons on the remote control repeatedly.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the short message display.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Sound field program descriptions
y
Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
Remote control
button
Category of the
program
Name of the
program
Created sound
fields
(see page 13)
CINEMA DSP
or
HiFi DSP
MOVIE
4
MOVIE
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive
cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and
DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB. Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
Program description
Available sound field parameters (see page 89)
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 52), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 51) or
surround decode mode (see page 84).
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
1
3
CLASSICAL
Hall in Munich
HiFi DSP
This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively
little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
1
3
Room Size
Liveness
CLASSICAL
Dialogue Lift
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP
A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which
produce a very full, rich sound.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
1
3
Room Size
Liveness
CLASSICAL
Dialogue Lift
Hall in Amsterdam
HiFi DSP
This is a large 2200 seat shoe-box type concert hall in Amsterdam. It has a circular stage with seats located behind the stage.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
CLASSICAL
ENTERTAIN
1
3
Room Size
Liveness
CLASSICAL
Dialogue Lift
Church in Freiburg
HiFi DSP
This program creates the acoustic environment of a big church located in south Germany. The reverberation delay is very long while the early
reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Liveness
Rev. Time
Rev. Delay
Rev. Level
Dialogue Lift
47 En
BASIC
OPERATION
■ For music audio sources
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
CLASSICAL
1
CLASSICAL
Chamber
HiFi DSP
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are
suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
LIVE/CLUB
2
Liveness
Rev. Time
LIVE/CLUB
Rev. Delay
Rev. Level
Dialogue Lift
Village Vanguard
HiFi DSP
A traditional jazz club in New York, located on 7th Avenue. This room has a low ceiling, and the “stage” is located at the corner of the room.
This program creates an intimate “close-to-the music” feel.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
LIVE/CLUB
2
Room Size
Liveness
LIVE/CLUB
Dialogue Lift
Warehouse Loft
HiFi DSP
This program simulates a space enclosed by concrete. An energetic sound field is created with relatively clear reflections from the walls.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
LIVE/CLUB
2
Room Size
Liveness
LIVE/CLUB
Rev. Time
Rev. Delay
Rev. Level
Dialogue Lift
Cellar Club
HiFi DSP
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the
listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
LIVE/CLUB
2
Room Size
Liveness
LIVE/CLUB
Dialogue Lift
The Roxy Theatre
HiFi DSP
The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s hottest rock club. The listener’s virtual seat
is at the center-left of the hall.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
LIVE/CLUB
2
Room Size
Liveness
LIVE/CLUB
Rev. Time
Rev. Delay
Rev. Level
Dialogue Lift
The Bottom Line
HiFi DSP
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Liveness
Dialogue Lift
■ For various sources
Note
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
ENTERTAIN
3
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts,
the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an
optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
48 En
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ENTERTAIN
3
ENTERTAINMENT
Action Game
This sound field has been optimized for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range
per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining
a clear sense of directions.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
ENTERTAIN
3
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game
This sound field has been optimized for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field
design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in
the movie scenes in the game.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
■ For visual sources of music
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
2
3
ENTERTAINMENT
Music Video
HiFi DSP
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot
live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to
the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
ENTERTAIN
3
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
ENTERTAINMENT
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. “Opera”
offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of
presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent
beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
■ For movie sources
y
You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 85 for details.
Note
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
MOVIE
4
MOVIE
Standard
This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel
audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded
by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
DSP Level
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
Sur. Liveness
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
SB Liveness
Dialogue Lift
49 En
BASIC
OPERATION
Note
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
MOVIE
MOVIE
4
Spectacle
This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making
both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or
DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
MOVIE
MOVIE
4
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and
expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround,
Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
MOVIE
MOVIE
4
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is
made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
MOVIE
MOVIE
4
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear
words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
MOVIE
MOVIE
4
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to
create sound depth using only the presence sound field.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Liveness
Rev. Time
Rev. Level
Rev. Delay
Dialogue Lift
■ Stereo playback
STEREO
5
STEREO
2ch STEREO
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 53 for details.
Direct
STEREO
5
STEREO
7ch STEREO
HiFi DSP
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2
channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties,
etc.
Center Level
Surround L Level
50 En
Surround R Level
Sur. Back Level
Presence L Level
Presence R Level
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
■ Using sound field programs without
surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
When you set “Surround” to “None” (see page 106),
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever
you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see
page 47).
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
Note
You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by using GUI screen.
See page 88 for details.
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel (or on the
remote control) to select “STRAIGHT”.
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or
HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 47). When
activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
Format
Dolby Digital
Description
Standard processing for Dolby
Digital sources.
DTS
Standard processing for DTS
sources. When the input source is
DTS-ES Discrete or DTS-ES
Matrix format, the respective
indicator appears in the front
panel display.
DSD
Plays back DSD (Direct Stream
Digital) sources.
PCM
Plays back PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) sources.
Notes
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 43).
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see
page 52) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 53) is selected, or
when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 51).
STRAIGHT
or
BASIC
OPERATION
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “Surround” is
set to “None” (see page 106) in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when the Pure Direct (see page 52) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see
page 53) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT”
mode (see page 51).
y
Plays back multi-channel PCM
(Pulse Code Modulation) sources.
MPCM
Analog
Plays back analog sources.
■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode
Press STRAIGHT on the remote control so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
or
EFFECT
EFFECT
51 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
Adjusting the tonal quality
Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound
of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is
activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the
least circuitry.
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front L/R, center, presence L/R speaker channels and
the subwoofer channel.
1
Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel (or on the
remote control) to turn on or off the Pure Direct
mode.
The PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up
while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel
display automatically dims.
Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select the high-frequency
response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency
response (BASS).
TONE
CONTROL
PURE DIRECT
or
PURE DIRECT
2
Front panel
Remote control
Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the
high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the
low-frequency response (BASS).
Notes
• When you play back the multi-channel PCM sources (less than
192 kHz), this unit downmixes the multi-channel signals
according to the “Speaker Set” in “Basic” (see page 105).
• When the component connected to the HDMI IN jacks is
selected as the input source and Audio input jack select is set to
“AUTO” or “HDMI”, this unit does not turn off the video
circuitry in the Pure Direct mode.
• When you set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”, “HDMI” or
“COAX/OPT” (see page 42) and play back the Dolby Digital,
DTS or multi channel PCM sources, this unit activates the
corresponding decoder.
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in
the Pure Direct mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the GUI screen
– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)
• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this
unit is turned off.
y
The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation
is performed.
PROGRAM
■ Bypassing the tone control circuitry
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
BYPASS and cancel the tone control.
TONE
CONTROL
Notes
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the
low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R,
center, presence L/R speakers and the subwoofer.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is
selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input
source.
y
Use “Tone Control” parameter in “Sound” menu to adjust the
balance of bass and treble output to your speakers or headphones
by using GUI screen. See page 99 for details.
52 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Adjusting the speaker level
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
2-channel stereo
You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels
and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.
Note
This operation will override the level adjustments made in “Auto
Setup” (see page 35) and “Speaker Level” (see page 109).
1
Set the operation mode to AMP and then press
STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to
select “2ch Stereo”.
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press LEVEL on the remote control
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to
adjust.
AMP
SOURCE
STEREO
5
TV
AMP
LEVEL
SOURCE
TITLE
BAND
TV
2ch Stereo
Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
SUR. R
Surround right speaker
SB L
Surround back right speaker
SB R
Surround back left speaker
SUR. L
Surround left speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
PRNS L
Presence left speaker
PRNS R
Presence right speaker
y
• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “Bass Out” is
set to “SWFR” or “Both” (see page 107).
• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the
PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode and adjust the
parameter by using GUI screen. See page 88 for details.
y
• Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can
also select the speaker by pressing k / n.
• Instead of “SB R” and “SB L”, “SB” is displayed if
“Surround Back” is set to either “Small x1” or “Large x1”
(see page 106).
2
Press l / h on the remote control to adjust
the speaker output level.
• Press h to increase the value.
• Press l to decrease the value.
Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
53 En
BASIC
OPERATION
Display
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Selecting the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode
Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are
created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is
resampled to lower the bit rate and to remove sounds that
are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The
Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances
your listening experience by regenerating the missing
harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened
complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as
well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass
is compensated, providing improved performance of the
overall sound system.
Notes
• When you play back DSD sources or PCM sources whose
sampling frequencies are higher than 48 kHz, this unit samples
them down to 48 kHz or lower and applies the Compressed
Music Enhancer mode.
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with
any of the sound field programs.
y
You can also select the Compressed Music Enhancer mode and
adjust the parameter by using GUI menu. See page 88 for details.
Press ENHANCER on the front panel (or set the
operation mode selector to AMP and then press
ENHANCER on the remote control) repeatedly to
select the desired Compressed Music Enhancer
mode.
The following short message appears on the video monitor
and the ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
AMP
ENHANCER
or
SOURCE
ENHANCER
ENT
TV
ENHANCER
MUSICENHANCER
2chEnhancer
54 En
Lights up
Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 7ch Enhancer, Off
• Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression
artifacts in 2-channel stereo.
• Select “7ch Enhancer” to play back compression
artifacts in 7-channel stereo.
• Select “Off” to turn off the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode.
Note
When you select “Off”, this unit returns to the previously
selected sound field program.
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Selecting the night listening mode
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on
the type of material you are playing.
1
Press NIGHT on the front panel (or set the
operation mode selector to AMP and then
press NIGHT on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
Notes
• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following
cases:
– when the Pure Direct mode (see page 52) is selected.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see
page 43).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness
depending on the input source and surround sound settings
you use.
AMP
NIGHT
SOURCE
or
NIGHT
+ 10
TV
BASIC
OPERATION
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
2
Press l / h on the remote control to adjust
the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front
panel display.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
55 En
FM/AM TUNING
FM/AM TUNING
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of
the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset
stations with each other.
Note
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.
FM/AM controls and functions
■ Front panel functions
1
2
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
■ Remote control functions
3
45 6 7
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
PHONO
1
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
POWER
DTV
TUNING
MODE
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
VCR 1
1
DTV
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PHONES
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
1 INPUT selector
Selects “TUNER” as the input source.
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
2
3
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
DISPLAY
3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
• Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8)
when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel
display (see page 59).
• Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not
displayed in the front panel display (see page 58).
4 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT
• Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
between selecting preset station numbers and selecting
the tuning frequency.
• Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 60).
5 FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see
page 57).
6 MEMORY
Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this
button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset
tuning (see page 59).
7 TUNING MODE
Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator
is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is
turned off) (see page 57).
3
5
ENTERTAIN
2
3
4
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
1 MEMORY
VOLUME
A/B/C/D/E
MUTE
ID1 ID2
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
MOVIE
1
5
PRESET
5
EFFECT
LIVE/CLUB
STEREO
9
Set to
SOURCE
PURE DIRECT
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
RETURN
MEMORY
4
TV
AUDIO
ENTER
CLASSICAL
2 A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) (see
page 59).
V-AUX/DOCK
DVD
AMP
(U.S.A. model)
56 En
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE NET/USB
SELECT
ZONE 2
SOURCE
PROGRAM
STANDBY
CD-R
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
CD
TUNER
6
7
8
2
NIGHT
ENHANCER
0
+ 10
ENT
(U.S.A. model)
1 TUNER
Selects “TUNER” as the input source. This unit is turned
into the last selected station.
2 BAND
Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see
page 57). This unit is turned into the last selected AM or
FM station.
3 PRESET/CH k / n
Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when
the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see
page 60).
4 Numeric buttons
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations (see
page 61).
5 A-E/CAT. l / h, A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the preset station groups (A to E) (see
page 59).
FM/AM TUNING
Automatic tuning
3
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
TUNING
MODE
(U.S.A. model)
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING/CH
PRESET/
TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
A
USB
FM 97.70MHz
AUTO
ON
OFF
MASTER
1
1
No colon (:)
4 32 3
Lights up
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the
colon (:) off.
BASIC
OPERATION
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
PRESET/
TUNING
INPUT
EDIT
4
Front panel
2
Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to
begin automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
• Press h to tune into a higher frequency.
• Press l to tune into a lower frequency.
FM/AM
FM
or
AM
PRESET/TUNING
A
FM 97.70MHz
TUNED
Lights up
57 En
FM/AM TUNING
Manual tuning
3
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator disappears from the front panel
display.
TUNING
MODE
Note
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
(U.S.A. model)
A
PURE DIRECT
FM 97.70MHz
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
No colon (:)
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
USB
ON
OFF
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
MASTER
1
4 32 3
PRESET/
TUNING
1
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
EDIT
4
INPUT
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune
into the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to continue searching.
PRESET/TUNING
Front panel
2
Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
FM/AM
FM
58 En
or
AM
FM/AM TUNING
Automatic preset tuning
3
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up
to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in
order. You can then recall any preset station easily by
selecting the preset station number.
Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3
seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.
MEMORY
(U.S.A. model)
MAN'L/AUTO FM
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
A1:FM 97.70MHz
USB
ON
OFF
AUTO MEMORY
MASTER
1
Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
Front panel
Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception
band.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
FM/AM
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
INPUT
2
Flashes
FM
• You can specify the preset number from which this unit
stores FM stations. Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/
TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3
to select the preset station number under which the first
station will be stored.
• You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store
FM stations automatically. Press PRESET/TUNING so
that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display
and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l after pressing
and holding MEMORY for more than 3 seconds.
Notes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after
searching for all the available stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station
you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it
manually and store it as described in “Manual preset
tuning” on page 60.
59 En
BASIC
OPERATION
1
Flashes
2 3
FM/AM TUNING
Manual preset tuning
4
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
• Press h to select a higher preset station number.
• Press l to select a lower preset station number.
(U.S.A. model)
PRESET/TUNING
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
PHONES
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
A1:FM 97.70MHz
3 4
2,5
Preset station number
1
2
MEMORY
Tune into a station automatically or manually.
See pages 57 and 58 for tuning instructions.
Press MEMORY.
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
5
Flashes
Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator
is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
Flashes
3
Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The selected preset station group letter appears.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
A1:FM 97.70MHz
The displayed station has been stored as A1.
A/B/C/D/E
Notes
A :FM 97.70MHz
Preset station Colon (:)
group
60 En
MEMORY
Flashes
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along
with the station frequency.
FM/AM TUNING
Selecting preset stations
2
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
(U.S.A. model)
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) to select the desired preset
station number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
S VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
OPTICAL
PRESET/TUNING
or
USB
ENTER
ON
OFF
MASTER
A/B/C/D/E
1 2
Front panel
Remote control
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
SOURCE
–
–
TV INPUT
MUTE
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
1,2
TV
1
BASIC
OPERATION
–
TV MUTE
PURE DIRECT
A1:FM 97.70MHz
AUDIO
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
RETURN
DISPLAY
EFFECT
MEMORY
(U.S.A. model)
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, set the
operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press TUNER to
select “TUNER” as the input source.
1
Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or set the
operation mode selector to SOURCE and
then press A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote
control) to select the desired preset station
group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
A/B/C/D/E
Front panel
or
PRESET/CH
AMP
SOURCE
ENTER
TV
A/B/C/D/E
Remote control
61 En
FM/AM TUNING
Exchanging preset stations
3
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 61.
(U.S.A. model)
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
PHONES
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
OPTICAL
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
A5:FM 97.70MHz
MEMORY
3 3 2,4
1
2
Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 61.
Press and hold EDIT for more than 3
seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
Flashes
4
Flashes
Press EDIT again.
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and
the assignments of the two preset stations are
exchanged.
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
EDIT
E1:FM 97.70MHz
Flashes
62 En
MEMORY
Flashes
E1-A5
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
XM Satellite Radio is a satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States and Canada,
broadcasting live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes over 160 digital channels of choice from coast to
coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33
channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the
traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide.
Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM
using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on
page 65. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada).
This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) that plays back the surround
sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience.
Notes
Connect XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold
separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit.
For details, see the operating instructions provided with
XM Passport System.
XM
(U.S.A. model)
■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.
XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM
Passport and XM Passport Home Dock required to receive
XM service (sold separately). Installation costs and other
fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may
apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and
programming subject to change. Channels with frequent
explicit language are indicated with an “XL”. Channel
blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling “1800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” (for residents in the
United States) or “1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)”
(for residents in Canada). Subscriptions subject to
Customer Agreement available at “http://
www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or
“http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). XM
service only available in the 48 continuous United States
and Canada. “XM Ready” is a trademark of XM Satellite
Radio Inc. © 2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights
reserved.
XM Passport and
XM Passport Home Dock
(sold separately)
63 En
BASIC
OPERATION
• The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48
contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii)
and Canada.
• XM Passport System and monthly subscription are sold
separately. For details, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States)
or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada).
• For information on obtaining the XM Passport System, visit the
XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States)
or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada), or
consult your local retailer that sells XM Ready products.
• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,
the XM Passport System must be placed at or near a southerly
facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can
mount it indoors or outdoors.
Connecting the XM Passport System
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
XM Satellite Radio controls and functions
Note
The following controls are available only when “XM” is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or
set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source.
■ Front panel functions
■ Remote control functions
POWER
POWER
2
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
3
4
PRESET/TUNING/CH
PRESET/
TUNING
56
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
XM
1
TUNING
MODE
POWER
STANDBY
1
AV
TV
1
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
CD
1
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
4
EDIT
DTV
CD
CD-R
2
3
DTV
DISPLAY
VCR 1
5
4
7
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE NET/USB
VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
POWER
XM
TUNER
6
ENT
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
9
0
8
ZONE CONTROLS
8
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
SELECT
AMP
PHONES
VIDEO AUX
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
Set to
SOURCE
VOLUME
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE
(U.S.A. model)
LEVEL
1 INPUT selector
Selects “XM” as the input source.
2 CATEGORY
(All Channel Search mode)
Changes the channel category while staying in the All
Channel Search mode.
(Category Search mode)
Changes the channel category.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel group (A to E).
3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
(All Channel Search mode)
Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold
for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press
and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).
4 SEARCH MODE
Changes the search mode between the All Channel
Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes
(see page 68).
5 MEMORY
Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 72).
6 DISPLAY
Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as
channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or
song title displayed in the front panel display or in the
OSD (see page 73).
64 En
2
3
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
MEMORY
CLASSICAL
4
PRESET/CH
TV
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
2
NIGHT
ENHANCER
9
1 MEMORY
0
+ 10
ENT
NET RADIO
USB
5
6
7
6
2
9
0
MUTE
A-E/CAT.
DISPLAY
PRESET/CH
ALL
PRESET
ID1 ID2
CAT.
ZONE 2 ZONE 3
NUMBER
7
A
B
8
REC
PC/MCX
OFF
ON
MACRO LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
(U.S.A. model)
1 XM
Selects “XM” as the input source.
2 PRESET/CH k / n
(All Channel Search mode)
Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold
for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press
and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).
3 MEMORY
Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 72).
4 Numeric buttons
(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)
Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.
(Preset Search mode)
Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
5 SRCH MODE
Changes the search mode between the All Channel
Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes
(see page 68).
6 A-E/CAT. l / h
(All Channel Search mode)
Changes the channel category.
(Category Search mode)
Changes the channel category.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel group (A to E).
7 DISPLAY
Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as
channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or
song title displayed in the front panel display or on the
video monitor (see page 73).
Activating XM Satellite Radio
To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio
service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required.
Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and
then visit the website or call toll-free with a major credit
card handy for signing up.
For residents in the United States
URL: http://activate.xmradio.com/
Toll-free: 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)
For residents in Canada
URL: https://activate.xmradio.ca/on-line-activation/
activation.jsp
Toll-free: 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)
BASIC
OPERATION
8 ENT
Confirms an entered channel number in the Direct
Number Access mode (see page 71).
9 ALL
Selects the All Channel Search mode (see page 68).
0 NUMBER
Press and hold before you press the input selector or
numeric buttons to switch the function to entering
numbers.
A PRESET
Selects the Preset Search Mode (see page 70).
B CAT.
Selects the Category Search mode (see page 69).
65 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
(U.S.A. model)
2
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
TONE
CONTROL
AUDIO
SELECT
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
ENHANCER
NIGHT
Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level
and adjust the orientation of XM Passport
System for a better percentage of the
reception level.
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
DISPLAY
INPUT
ZONE CONTROLS
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
y
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
VIDEO
S VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by
using the “Antenna Level” parameter in “Input Select” (see
page 94).
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
1
3
Notes
• If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel
display, XM Passport System may not be connected to the
XM jack on the rear panel of this unit properly. See
“Connecting the XM Passport System” on page 63 and
check the connection.
• The “Antenna Level” parameter in “Input Select” (See
page 94) cannot be adjusted by using the remote control.
Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of XM Passport
System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better
percentage of the reception level.
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
1
SOURCE
1
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
XM
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PRESET/CH
LEVEL
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
DTV
VCR 1
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
3
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
TV
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
MEMORY
(U.S.A. model)
1
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the operation mode selector to
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote
control) to select “XM” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in
the front panel display.
3
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) to select channel “0”.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/TUNING
or
INPUT
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
Front panel
Note
Front panel
You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search
mode (see page 68) is not selected.
or
AMP
4
XM
SOURCE
TV
Remote control
66 En
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1 CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number
displayed in the front panel display and write
it down.
ID:_____________________________________
Lights up
V-AUX
Remote control
CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
TUNER XM
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
Basic XM Satellite Radio
operations
1
(U.S.A. model)
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING/CH
PRESET/
TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
DISPLAY
INPUT
ZONE CONTROLS
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the operation mode selector to
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote
control) to select “XM” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in
the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio
information (such as channel number, channel name,
category, artist name, or song title) for the currently
selected channel appears in the front panel display.
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
S VIDEO
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
INPUT
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
INPUT selector
POWER
TV
XM button
XM
PHONO
POWER
STANDBY
Front panel
POWER
AV
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
AMP
XM
SOURCE
DTV
VCR 1
TV
SELECT
Remote control
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
SOURCE
TV
Lights up
Set to SOURCE
(U.S.A. model)
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1 CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
TUNER XM
[001] Preview
y
When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.
Note
The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
2
Search for a channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
“All Channel Search mode” on page 68.
• To select a channel by category, see “Category
Search mode” on page 69.
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
“Preset Search mode” on page 70.
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct Number Access
mode” on page 71.
y
• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the
surround sound content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts
in multi-channels (see page 84).
• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see
page 72).
• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the
front panel display or on the video monitor (see page 73).
67 En
BASIC
OPERATION
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
or
SLEEP
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ All Channel Search mode
2
(U.S.A. model)
Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)
repeatedly to change the channel category.
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
DISPLAY
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
A/B/C/D/E
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
or
OPTICAL
ENTER
USB
ON
OFF
A/B/C/D/E
MASTER
2
Front panel
3 1
3
TV MUTE
LEVEL
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
TITLE
MUTE
SET MENU
PURE DIRECT
MENU
SRCH MODE
BAND
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
STRAIGHT
RETURN
MEMORY
1
2,3
DISPLAY
Remote control
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) repeatedly to search for a
channel within all channels.
EFFECT
(U.S.A. model)
1
PRESET/CH
PRESET/TUNING
Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”.
or
EDIT
Remote control
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
Front panel
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
Front panel
PRESET/
TUNING
Remote control
ALL CH SEARCH
68 En
or
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel
(or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control).
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ Category Search mode
(U.S.A. model)
2
Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)
repeatedly to change the channel category.
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
DISPLAY
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
S VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
A/B/C/D/E
or
OPTICAL
ENTER
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
A/B/C/D/E
2
Front panel
3 1
3
TV MUTE
LEVEL
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
MUTE
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
STRAIGHT
RETURN
MEMORY
1
2,3
DISPLAY
EFFECT
Remote control
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) repeatedly to search for a
channel within the selected channel
category.
PRESET/CH
1
Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.
PRESET/
TUNING
SET MENU
or
or
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
Front panel
Remote control
MENU
EDIT
Front panel
PRESET/TUNING
SRCH MODE
Remote control
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel
(or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control).
CAT SEARCH
69 En
BASIC
OPERATION
(U.S.A. model)
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ Preset Search mode
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For
details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset
channels” on page 72.
2
Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)
repeatedly to change the preset channel
group (A to E).
y
PRESET/CH
The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is
“[001] Preview”.
A/B/C/D/E
or
(U.S.A. model)
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PURE DIRECT
Front panel
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
Remote control
NIGHT
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
DISPLAY
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
S VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
3
OPTICAL
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
2
3 1
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) repeatedly to change the
preset channel number (1 to 8).
PRESET/CH
TV MUTE
LEVEL
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
MUTE
SET MENU
PURE DIRECT
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
A-E/CAT.
STRAIGHT
RETURN
MEMORY
PRESET/TUNING
or
AUDIO
ENTER
1
2,3
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
EFFECT
(U.S.A. model)
Front panel
1
Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”.
PRESET/
TUNING
SET MENU
or
EDIT
MENU
SRCH MODE
Front panel
Remote control
PRESET SEARCH
70 En
Remote control
y
You can also select the preset channel number directly by
pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ Direct Number Access mode
2
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
TITLE
SET MENU
PURE DIRECT
MENU
1
SRCH MODE
BAND
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
PARAMETER STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
MEMORY
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
2
NIGHT
ENHANCER
0
+ 10
ENT
1 MEMORY
9
MOVIE
Press the numeric buttons on the remote
control to enter the desired three-digit
channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
numeric buttons as shown below.
2
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
(U.S.A. model)
1
The display changes as follows.
Press SRCH MODE on the remote control
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or
“CAT SEARCH”.
<XM> --1
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
Remote control
BASIC
OPERATION
<XM> -12
ALL CH SEARCH
or
<XM>123
CAT SEARCH
y
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the
numeric buttons on the remote control and then press ENT
to confirm the input number.
• Instead of pressing ENT to tune into the channel
immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit
confirms the entered channel number.
• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter
a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically
confirms the entered channel number.
• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons or ENT
cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.
71 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
Setting the XM Satellite Radio
preset channels
2
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in
each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall
any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel
group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”
on page 70.
Press MEMORY on the front panel (or
MEMORY on the remote control).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
or
Front panel
RETURN
MEMORY
Remote control
(U.S.A. model)
PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING/CH
PRESET/
TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
Flashes
DISPLAY
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
S VIDEO
PHONES
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
VIDEO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
USB
ON
OFF
Note
MASTER
3 4
LEVEL
3,4
2,5
PRESET/CH
2,5
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
STRAIGHT
RETURN
MEMORY
DISPLAY
EFFECT
(U.S.A. model)
1
You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while
the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel
display.
Search for a channel you want to set as a
preset channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on
page 67 for details.
3
Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)
repeatedly to select a preset channel group
(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The preset channel group letter appears in the front
panel display.
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
or
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
[043] XMU
Front panel
Remote control
Currently selected channel number
C
[043] XMU
Currently selected preset channel group
72 En
MEMORY
Flashes
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
4
Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) repeatedly to select a preset
channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The preset channel number appears in the front panel
display.
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information
You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such
as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,
or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front
panel display or in the OSD.
(U.S.A. model)
PRESET/CH
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/TUNING
or
VOLUME
ENTER
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING/CH
PRESET/
TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
SEARCH MODE
CATEGORY
A/B/C/D/E
DISPLAY
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
SILENT CINEMA
OPTIMIZER
MIC
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
USB
ON
OFF
Front panel
Remote control
MASTER
DISPLAY
[043] XMU
MEMORY
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO
ENTER
A-E/CAT.
STRAIGHT
Flashes
Currently selected preset channel number
BASIC
OPERATION
C5
RETURN
MEMORY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
EFFECT
(U.S.A. model)
5
Press MEMORY on the front panel (or
MEMORY on the remote control) to set the
selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a
preset channel while the MEMORY indicator
is flashing.
A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number
for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns
off in the front panel display.
Note
If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel
display or on the video monitor, see the “XM Satellite Radio
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 139 for appropriate remedies.
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information in the front panel display
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
or
Front panel
RETURN
MEMORY
Remote control
Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the
remote control repeatedly to toggle between the
following XM Satellite Radio information display
modes.
TUNING
MODE
Channel number / name
C5: [043] XMU
Front panel
or
Channel category
Colon (:)
DISPLAY
Note
Artist name / Song title
Remote control
Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously
stored in the same preset channel group and number is
cleared.
73 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
When the channel number / name is displayed:
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information on the video monitor
[043] XMU
When the channel category is displayed:
Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following information screen is displayed on the
video monitor.
TUNING
MODE
or
DISPLAY
<CAT>Rock
Front panel
Remote control
When the artist name / song title is displayed:
XM Information
CH NUMBER
CH NAME
CATEGORY
NAME
TITLE
Coldplay / Spe
Hold : ENTER
y
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric
characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM
Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a
continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by
using the “Scroll” parameter in “Front Panel Disp.” (see
page 112).
• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that
cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be
displayed with a space.
Note
If you press DISPLAY while the XM Satellite Radio information
display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the
XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as
described above.
74 En
All CH Search
043
XMU
Rock
Coldplay
Speed of sound
y
• To turn off the displayed information screen, press DISPLAY
on the front panel (or on the remote control).
• You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio
information is displayed in on the video monitor by using the
“On Screen” parameter in “Manual Setup” (see page 103).
• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press
ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed on the
video monitor.
• The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released
if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you
change the XM Satellite Radio channel.
• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information
screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM
Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote
control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio
information screen is being hold.
USING IPOD
USING iPod
Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected
to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 29), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression
artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 54).
Notes
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
Controlling iPod
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as
the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done
with the aid of the GUI screen of this unit (menu browse
mode) or without it (simple remote mode).
■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote
mode
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without
the aid of the GUI screen of this unit.
y
• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse
mode
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod
using the supplied remote control with the aid of the GUI
screen of this unit. The name of the song being played
appears in the front panel display according to the “Scroll”
parameter in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 112). You can
also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the GUI
screen. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your
iPod to suit your personal preferences.
Notes
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your
iPod.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front
panel display or in the GUI screen of this unit. Those characters
are replaced with underscores “_”.
• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in
the GUI screen. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle
between the “Settings” parameter settings.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your
iPod in the GUI screen. Instead, you must use the controls on
your iPod to select the desired photos or video clips.
• You can select the amount of time the GUI screen of iPod is
displayed in on the video monitor by using the “On Screen”
parameter in “Manual Setup” (see page 103).
75 En
BASIC
OPERATION
• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other
components” on page 119.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and on the video monitor, see the “iPod” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 147.
• Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod.
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges
the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “Standby Charge” parameter in “iPod”
(see page 104).
• While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 12) appears in the
front panel display. Once the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears.
USING iPod
1
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press DISPLAY on the remote
control.
The following display appears in the video monitor.
AMP
SOURCE
DISPLAY
TV
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in
random order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random
order.
• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in
random order.
Note
Top
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “
” appears
in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Settings
2
Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
navigate the iPod menu and then press
ENTER to begin playback of the selected
song.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
Note
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ”
appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of
songs are being repeated.
■ The functions of the play information
display
ENTER
ENTER
Repeat (Repeat)
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
A/B/C/D/E
5
6
7
Play Information
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),
Albums (albums), Songs (songs),
Genres (genres), Composers (composers),
Settings (settings)
• Playlists > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat
1
1/9
Frankie Zipper
2
Made-to-order
3
Road to India
4
0:51
1 Track number/total tracks
2 Name of the album
3 Name of the song
4 Elapsed time
5 h (playback) or e (pausing)
6 Shuffle and repeat icons
7 Name of the artist
8 Progress bar
9 Remaining time
76 En
8
-7:44
9
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA
files saved on your PC, YAMAHA MCX-2000, USB memory device and USB portable audio player or access the
Internet Radio.
Notes
• YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical
reference books, if needed.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.
y
• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control the network and USB features, see the “PC/MCX-2000/Internet
Radio/USB” column in “Controlling other components” on page 119.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and on the video monitor, see the “Network and USB”
section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 144.
The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu.
NET/USB
PC/MusicCAST
(MCX-2000)
Internet Radio
USB
Server*
Playlists
Selects a song by playlist stored on the server. Refer to the documents of
the server for details about the playlist file format, the process of creating
the playlist file, etc.
Artists
Selects a song by artist. In addition, you can select an album within the
artist (MCX-2000 only).
Albums
Selects a song by album.
Songs
Selects a song directly.
Genres
Selects a song by genre. In addition, you can select an album within the
genre (MCX-2000 only).
Recall Play
Makes this unit recall play from MCX-2000 or another client. For details,
refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000.
Bookmarks
Selects an Internet Radio station that has been added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 80).
Locations
Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by location.
Genres
Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by genre.
New Stations
Selects an Internet Radio station from the ones that have recently started the service.
Popular Stations
Selects an Internet Radio station from the list of popular stations.
Podcasts
Selects a Podcast service by location or genre.
Help
Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service.
Files/Directories
Selects a file by navigating directories.
Note
*
Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.
77 En
BASIC
OPERATION
Navigating the network and USB menus
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate
the network and USB menus. See pages 79 and 80 for
details about each sub input source.
3
Press k / n to select the desired sub input
source and then press h or ENTER.
y
Note
You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing
the corresponding button on the remote control (see page 8).
“Please wait” may appear whenever it takes time for
communication. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
FREQ/TEXT
EON
NET RADIO
USB
REC
1
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press NET/USB on the remote
control to select “NET/USB” as the input
source.
The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator
lights up in the front panel display, and the contents
previously played for the corresponding sub input
source of NET/USB is automatically played.
PC/MCX
4
AMP
Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
select the desired song or Internet Radio
station.
• Press k / n to select the desired menu.
• Press h to enter the selected menu.
• Press l to return to the previous menu level.
y
NET/USB
SOURCE
• “h” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that
there is a submenu available in the next menu level.
• You can press ENTER or MENU to enter the selected
menu or to return to the previous menu level.
TV
Lights up
5
NET/USB
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1 CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
TUNER
Press ENTER to play the selected song or to
listen to the selected station.
y
2
Press DISPLAY on the remote control to
display the top NET/USB menu.
The following display appears on the video monitor.
If any other screen appears on the video monitor,
press MENU on the remote control repeatedly until
the top NET/USB menu appears.
Top
PC/MusicCAST
Internet Radio
USB
DISPLAY
78 En
• See page 76 for details about the functions of the play
information display.
• Some items do not appear in the play information display
depending on the selected sub input source.
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
Using a PC server or YAMAHA
MCX-2000
Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or
YAMAHA MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that
enhances the concept of YAMAHA exclusive
MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method over a
personal network.
1
Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your
PC, or register this unit on your YAMAHA
MCX-2000.
• Refer to “Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0
on your PC” on page 79 and “Registering this unit
on the YAMAHA MCX-2000” on page 80.
• This procedure is needed only the first time.
Turn on your PC or MCX-2000.
The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server
list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
3
Select a desired server or MusicCAST to
begin playback.
With Windows Media Connect 2.0, you can play back the
audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents
of Windows Media Connect 2.0.
1
Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your
PC.
You can download the installer of Windows Media
Connect 2.0 from the Microsoft website.
2
Turn on your PC and then share a folder on
the PC.
The Shared folder is added to the server list on the
submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
Notes
• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus
software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this
unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software
appropriately.
• If you are using a PC with Windows XP Professional, and the
PC is logging on to a domain, you may not be able to connect
the PC server. In such cases, log on to the local machine instead
of the domain.
Notes
• YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• You can connect this unit to up to 4 PC servers and 1
MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same
subnet as this unit.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files on your PC may not be
playable or may be noisy when played.
• (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not
been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files
immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting
of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000.
y
• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at
the bottom of the playback information screen.
• You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s
to start/stop playback independently from the menu on the
video monitor.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the
“Play Style” parameters in “NET/USB” (see page 110).
• You can set whether to display the operation status in the front
panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
characters after scrolling all characters once by using “Scroll”
in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 112).
79 En
BASIC
OPERATION
2
■ Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0
on your PC
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
■ Registering this unit on the YAMAHA
MCX-2000
You must register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000
so that this unit can be recognized by your YAMAHA
MCX-2000. For details, refer to the operation manual
supplied with your YAMAHA MCX-2000.
1
Turn off this unit.
Using the Internet Radio
Use this feature to listen to Internet Radio stations. This
unit uses the vTuner Internet Radio station database
service particularly customized for this unit, providing
over 2000 radio station database. Further, you can store
your favorite stations with bookmarks.
Notes
2
Set your YAMAHA MCX-2000 to the “Auto
Config” mode.
3
Turn on this unit.
• MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the
submenu of PC/MCX.
• The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of
your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (shown as CLXXXXX), and this completes the automatic
configuration procedure.
Notes
• The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5
digits of the MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC
address, see page 111.
• To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual
Config” mode of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then set “N-RESET” in
the advanced setup menu of this unit to “RESET” (see
page 136).
• The client control functions of MusicCAST over this unit other
than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client
title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will
stop the playback on this unit.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Some Internet Radio stations may not be played even if they are
selected in the NET RADIO menu.
• To listen to the Internet Radio, connect this unit to your network
(see page 30).
• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will
not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is
strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem,
etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.
y
• You can use h / s to start/stop playback independently from
the menu on the video monitor.
• “Podcast” is a type of the Internet Radio service, and there are a
number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The
Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops
playback when an episode of the Podcast ends.
• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access
of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure
the security settings appropriately.
■ Storing your favorite Internet Radio
stations with bookmarks
Use this feature to select your favorite Internet Radio
stations quickly.
Press and hold TITLE on the remote control while
the selected Internet Radio station service is
being broadcast.
The stored Internet Radio station is added to the
“Bookmarks” list (see page 77).
y
To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the
first level of the “Bookmarks” list and then press and hold TITLE
on the remote control.
80 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
Using a USB memory device or a
USB portable audio player
Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3
and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or
USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on
the front panel of this unit.
Notes
Using shortcut buttons
Use this feature to access the desired music sources (WAV,
MP3 and WMA files on the connected PC, MCX-2000 or
USB storage devices and Internet Radio stations) directly.
You can preset 8 items in each sub input sources.
■ Assigning the items to the numeric
button (1-8)
• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices using FAT
16 or FAT 32.
• Only the first partition is displayed in the GUI menu. You
cannot select files in other partitions.
• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per
directory are recognized.
• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the
requirements.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may
be noisy when played.
• When you connect your USB memory device or USB portable
audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay.
1
y
2
• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at
the bottom of the playback information screen.
• You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s
to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the
“Play Style” parameters in “NET/USB” (see page 110).
• You can set whether to display the operation status in the front
panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
characters after scrolling all characters once by using “Scroll”
in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 112).
Select a desired music source you want to
assign to the numeric button (1-8), and then
play back the source.
See page 78 for details.
3
Press MEMORY.
This unit in the memory preset mode. The MEMORY
indicator flashes and following message appears in
the video monitor and front panel display.
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press NET/USB on the remote
control to select “NET/USB” as the input
source.
AMP
NET/USB
SOURCE
TV
MEMORY
Connect a USB jack of a USB memory device or
USB portable audio player to the USB port on the
front panel of this unit.
-:PC/MCX
Preset number
ENHANCER
MEMORY
Flashes
NIGHT
S
y
When you do not complete each of the following steps within 5
seconds, the memory preset mode is automatically canceled. In
this case, start over from step 3.
USB
USB memory device or USB
portable audio player
81 En
BASIC
OPERATION
RETURN
■ Connecting a USB memory device or a
USB potable audio player
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
4
Press desired numeric buttons (1-8).
The number of the selected numeric button appears in
the video monitor or front panel display.
NET/USB
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1 CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MOVIE
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
3
Press one of the numeric button (1-8) which
the desired item is assigned to select the
item as the input source.
The selected preset number appears in the front panel
display, and this unit starts the playback of the source
assigned to the selected numeric button.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
MOVIE
TUNER
1:PC/MCX
MEMORY
NET/USB
Selected preset number
Flashes
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1 CBL/SAT
DTV
DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
TUNER
1:PC/MCX
Selected preset number
5
Press ENTER or MEMORY to confirm the
preset.
Notes
PRESET/CH
or
RETURN
ENTER
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
■ Select an item by using numeric buttons
(1-8)
1
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press NET/USB on the remote
control to select “NET/USB” as the input
source.
AMP
NET/USB
SOURCE
TV
2
Select the desired sub input source.
FREQ/TEXT
EON
NET RADIO
USB
REC
PC/MCX
82 En
• “Empty Memory!” appears in the front panel display and
the short message display when you press the numeric
button (1-8) to which no items are assigned.
• This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to the
selected numeric button (1-8) in the following cases:
– the connected USB device is incorrect.
– the PC or MCX-2000 which stores the selected item is
turned off or disconnected from the network.
– the selected Internet Radio station is temporary
unavailable or out of service.
– the directory of the selected item has been changed.
y
This unit stores the relative position of the preset items in a
directory or playlist, and does not recall the correct item by
using numeric buttons (1-8) if you add or delete music files
to or from the same directory or playlist as the preset items.
In such cases, preset the desired item to the numeric buttons
(1-8) again.
We recommend the following methods:
PC server/MCX-2000
Create eight playlists which contain desired items, and then
preset the top item of each playlist to the numeric buttons
(1-8). When you change the items which are preset to the
numeric buttons (1-8), replace the registered items in the
playlist with the desired items without deleting the playlist.
USB devices
Create eight directories which contain desired items in a
directory beside the directory which contains all music files,
and then preset the top item of each directory to the numeric
buttons (1-8). When you change the items which are preset
to the numeric buttons (1-8), replace the items in the
directory to the desired items without deleting the directory.
RECORDING
RECORDING
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
CAUTION
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in
noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the
following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs
(when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.
Notes
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
(U.S.A. model)
3
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select the source component you
want to record from.
Select “SOURCE” to record the currently selected
input source.
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
OPTICAL
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
32
PROGRAM
Front panel
1
Turn on all the connected components.
2
Press REC OUT/ZONE 2 repeatedly until the
RECOUT indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
REC OUT/
ZONE2
4
Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
5
Start recording on the recording component.
RECOUT
83 En
BASIC
OPERATION
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 52), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 109) and the sound field programs (see
page 47) do not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• The XM Satellite Radio signals (U.S.A. and Canada models only) cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,
analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is
connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
Selecting decoders
2
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel
sources (surround decode mode)
Use this feature to play back sources with selected
decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multichannels.
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SUR. DECODE on the remote
control to select the surround decode mode.
AMP
SUR. DECODE
SOURCE
6
Press SELECT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending
on the type of source you are playing and your
personal preference.
SELECT
7
y
• You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT
and then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control.
• You can select the desired decoder and adjust the decoder
parameter settings by using GUI screen. See page 88 for
details.
TV
■ Decoder descriptions
Remote control
button
Category of the
program
Name of the
decoder
(Decoder Type)
SUR. DECODE
PLIIxMusic
PLIIMusic
SUR.DECODE
6
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not
available when “Surround Back” is set to “None” (see page 106).
Panorama
Dimension
Center Width
Program description
Available sound field parameters (see page 89)
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR. DECODE
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR. DECODE
PLIIx Movie
PL II Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround
Back” is set to “None” (see page 106).
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR. DECODE
PLIIx Music
PL II Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround
Back” is set to “None” (see page 106).
Panorama
84 En
Dimension
Center Width
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR. DECODE
PLIIx Game
PL II Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround
Back” is set to “None” (see page 106).
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR. DECODE
Neo: 6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources.
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR. DECODE
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources.
Center Image
SUR.DECODE
6
neural sur.
SUR. DECODE
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)
Neural Surround processing for any sources.
The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz) and analog 2channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surroundincompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of
XM Satellite Radio.
y
When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND
DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Selecting decoders used with sound field programs
Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with
MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).
See page 49 for details about MOVIE sound field
program.
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press MOVIE on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired MOVIE
sound field programs.
Available decoders (Decoder Type)
Decoder
PRO LOGIC
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
AMP
MOVIE
SOURCE
4
TV
2
Neo:6 Cinema
Functions
Dolby Pro Logic processing for
any sources
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby
Pro Logic II) processing for
movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx
decoder is not available when
“Surround Back” is set to “None”
(see page 106).
DTS processing for movie
sources
Press SELECT repeatedly to select the
desired decoder used with the selected
sound field program.
You can select from the following decoders
depending on the type of source you are playing and
your personal preference.
y
• You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT
and then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control.
• You can also select decoders used with sound field
programs by using GUI screen. Set “Decoder Type” in
Stereo/Surround” to the desired setting (see page 88).
85 En
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel
sources
If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX
or DTS-ES decoders.
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control
repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1channel playback.
AMP
EXTD SUR.
SOURCE
8
TV
2
Press l / h repeatedly to select a decoder
while the name of the decoder is displayed.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Decoders
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the format of the source you are playing.
Decoder
Functions
PLIIxMovie
q D+PLIIx Movie
DTS+PLIIx Movie
MPCM+PLIIx Movie
DSD+PLIIx Movie
Plays back multi-channel
sources in 7.1 channels using
the Pro Logic IIx movie
decoder.
PLIIxMusic
q D+PLIIx Music
DTS+PLIIx Music
MPCM+PLIIx Music
DSD+PLIIx Music
Plays back multi-channel
sources in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the Pro Logic IIx music
decoder.
DTS ES
DTS 96/24 ES
Plays back DTS signals in 6.1/
7.1 channels using the DTS-ES
decoder.
DOLBY D EX
DTS+DOLBY EX
MPCM+DOLBY EX
DSD+DOLBY EX
Plays back multi-channel
sources in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the Dolby Digital EX
decoder.
A/B/C/D/E
Auto AUTO
When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is
input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back
the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.
If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present
in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in
6.1/7.1 channels.
86 En
Off OFF
Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels.
Notes
• “PLIIx Movie” is available only when “Surround Back” (see
page 106) is set to “Small x2” or “Large x2”.
• Some 6.1/7.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag
that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing
these kinds of discs in 6.1/7.1 channels, select a decoder
manually from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”.
• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press
EXTD SUR. in the following cases:
– when “Surround” (see page 106) or “Surround Back” (see
page 106) is set to “None”.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is being played.
– when the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 53) or Pure Direct (see
page 52) mode is selected.
• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to “Auto”.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround
Back” is set to “None” (see page 106).
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) screen that helps you to control the amplifier function of
this unit. With the GUI screen, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit.
■
Stereo/Surround
Sound
Input Select
Video
Manual Setup
Basic
Auto Setup
NET/USB
System Memory
Option
Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)
Use this feature to select the sound field programs and customize the program parameter settings (see page 88).
■ Input Select (Input select menu)
Use this feature to select the input source and customize the parameters of each input source.
■ Manual Setup (Manual setup menu)
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 97).
Sound (Sound menu)
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors (see page 97).
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Video (Video menu)
Use this feature to manually adjust the video parameters (see page 101).
Basic (Basic menu)
Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker parameters (see page 104).
NET/USB (Network and USB menu)
Use this menu to manually adjust the network and USB system parameters (see page 109).
Option (Option menu)
Use this feature to manually adjust the optional system parameters (see page 111).
■ Auto Setup (Auto setup menu)
Use this menu to run Auto Setup and specify which speaker parameters to be adjusted (see page 35).
■ System Memory (System memory menu)
Use this feature to store and recall various settings of this unit (see page 115).
■ Signal Info. (Signal information)
Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 116).
■ Language (GUI language menu)
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI screen of this unit (see page 117).
y
• You can also select the GUI language using “GUI LANGUAGE” parameter in “ADVANCED SETUP” in the front panel display (see
page 136).
• See page 44 for details about the operations in GUI screen.
87 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Stereo/Surround
(Stereo/Surround menu)
4
Press k / n repeatedly to select the desired
programs.
PRESET/CH
Use this feature to select the sound field programs (see
page 46), the surround decode mode, the “STRAIGHT”
mode (See page 51) or the Compressed Music Enhancer
mode (See page 54), and adjust the parameters of each
program.
■ Selecting sound field programs and
setting the parameters by using GUI
screen
1
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
5
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
Press h on the remote control and then k / n
to select the desired parameter.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
AMP
ENTER
ENTER
SET MENU
SOURCE
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
MENU
SRCH MODE
TV
y
2
Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
select “Stereo/Surround” and then press h.
You can select “Initialize” to set all the parameters of the selected
sound field program to the default values. See page 93 for details.
6
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
Press h and then press l / h to adjust the
selected parameter.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
Input Assign
Dimmer
Support Audio
3
7
Stereo/Surround
CLASSICAL
Input Select
LIVE/CLUB
Manual Setup
ENTERTAINMENT
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
88 En
Press ENTER or k / n to confirm the setting
of the selected parameter.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
Press k / n repeatedly to select the desired
category of the programs and then press h.
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
or
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
Sound field parameter
Features
Decoder Type
Decoder type. Selects the decoder used with the SUR. DECODE or MOVIE programs. See
pages 84 and 85 for details.
DSP Level
DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on
the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level
relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance
from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The
larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set
to a large value.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Init. Delay)
1 to 49 ms (Sur. Init. Delay and SB Init. Delay)
Source sound
Level
Level
Early
reflections
Level
Init. Delay
Sur. Init. Delay
SB Init. Delay
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Small value = 1 ms
Large value = 99 ms
89 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Sound field parameter
Room Size
Sur. Room Size
SB Room Size
Features
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
Time
Early
reflections
Level
Level
Level
Source sound
Time
Time
Sound source
Small value = 0.1
Liveness
Sur. Liveness
SB Liveness
Large value = 2.0
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the
hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which
has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as
“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets
you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
Control range: 0 to 10
Source sound
Time
Small reflected
sound
Small value = 0
90 En
Level
Dead
Level
Level
Live
Time
Time
Large reflected
sound
Large value = 10
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Sound field parameter
Rev. Time
Features
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
Source sound
Reverberation
Reverberation
Early reflections
60 dB
Rev. Time
Sound source
60 dB
Rev. Time
Short
reverberation
Rev. Time
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Level
Rev. Delay
60 dB
Source sound
(dB)
60 dB
Reverberation
Time
Rev. Delay
Rev. Time
91 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Sound field parameter
Rev. Level
Features
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the
stronger the reverberation becomes.
Level
Control range: 0 to 100%
Source sound
Rev. Level
Time
Dialogue Lift
Dialogue lift. Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the
front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher
the position of the front and center channel sound.
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
■ Stereo program parameter descriptions
Sound field parameter
2ch Stereo
Direct
Features
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo
sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.
Choices: Auto, Off
y
• Select “Auto” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when
“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 52).
• Select “Off” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when
“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the
subwoofer in the following cases:
– “Bass Out” is set to “Both” (see page 107).
– “Front” is set to “Small” (see page 105) and “Bass Out” is set to “SWFR” (see page 107).
7ch Stereo
Center Level
Surround L Level
Surround R Level
Sur. Back Level
Presence L Level
Presence R Level
92 En
7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right
levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 to 100%
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ The Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter descriptions
The Compressed Music
Enhancer mode
2ch Enhancer
7ch Enhancer
Features
2-channel enhancer or 7-channel enhancer effect level. Select “High” or “Low” to adjust the effect for
the high-frequency.
Choices: High, Low
■ Decoder parameter descriptions
Decoder parameter
Pro Logic IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
Panorama
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
Dimension
Features
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as
well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: Off, On
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front
or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
Center Width
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely
towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center
channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
DTS Neo:6 Music
Center Image
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0
Initial setting: 0.3
■ Initialize (Program parameters initialization)
Use this feature to initialize the parameter of the selected sound field program.
Choices: No, Yes
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
Initialize
No
Yes
• Select “Yes” to set the program parameters to the factory default settings.
• Select “No” to cancel the program parameter initialization.
y
Use the “Sur. Initialize” feature in “Option” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group
(see page 114).
93 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Initial setting: 3
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Input Select
1
Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the
input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the
signal input at each input source.
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
The top display appears.
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
Input source
Parameter
MENU
SRCH MODE
TV
XM
(U.S.A. and Canada models
only)
Antenna Level
Volume Trim
Rename
TUNER
Volume Trim
Rename
PHONO
CD
CD-R
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
V-AUX or DOCK
I/O Assignment*
Audio Select*
Decoder Mode*
Volume Trim
Rename
PC/MCX, NET RADIO or
USB
MULTI CH
2
Stereo/Surround
Sound
Input Select
Video
Manual Setup
Basic
Auto Setup
NET/USB
System Memory
Option
Select “Input Select” and then press h.
CD-R
Stereo/Surround
Input Select
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
Volume Trim
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
Multi CH Assign
BGV
Notes
• Some parameters described above may not be available for all
input sources and some parameters are only available for
specific input sources.
• When iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, “DOCK” appears in the “Input Select”
menu instead of “V-AUX”. In such cases, the parameters
marked with asterisk (*) in the above table does not appears in
the input source parameter menu.
• When you select “NET/USB” as the input source, selected sub
input source (PC/MCX, NET RADIO or USB) appears in the
Input Select menu.
3
Select the desired input source (CD, DVD,
etc.) and then press h or ENTER to access
and adjust.
■ Antenna Level (Antenna level)
Use this feature to check the current reception level of the
XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this
unit (see page 63). For the best reception, orient the XM
Passport System so that a value of 60% or more is
displayed here.
Display status: None, 0 to 100%
Antenna Level
Antenna Level
100%
Volume Trim
Rename
Notes
• “None” is displayed if the XM Passport System is not connected to
this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 63).
• The “Antenna Level” parameter cannot be adjusted by using the
remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the
XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a
better percentage of the reception level.
94 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each input source. This is useful if you want to balance the
level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in
volume when switching between input sources.
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
3
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
0.0dB
Volume Trim
Press k / n to select the character you want
to use and l / h to move to the next one.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
• Press n to change the character in the following
order, or press k to go in the reverse order:
CAPITAL A to Z, space
SMALL a to z, space
FIGURE 0 to 9, space
MARK
!, #, %, &, etc.
• Press ENTER to switch between character types.
• Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input.
Rename
Note
Even if you select “Français”, “Deutsch”, Espaсol” or
“Русский” in “Language” (see page 117), you cannot use
accent symbols or cyrillic alphabets for the name of each
input.
y
This parameter also affects the signals output at ZONE OUT
jacks.
Note
4
• You can only adjust the volume for the current input source
using this setting.
y
■ Rename (Rename)
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the
GUI screen or the front panel display menu. (DVD is used
as the source component in the following example.)
Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or character you want to edit.
CAPITAL
Volume Trim
DVD
OK
2
Note
You can only change the name of the current input source
(except for multi channel input sources) using this setting.
Decoder Mode
Rename
• Select “RESET” to set the name of the selected input to default.
• This feature is useful when you change the input or output
assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.
• You can also change the name of the input source that appears
in the display window on the remote control. Refer to
“Changing source names in the display window” on page 123”.
RESET
Press ENTER repeatedly to select a character
type (CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/MARK).
95 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
1
Press l / h to select OK and press ENTER
when complete.
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ I/O Assignment
(Input/output assignment)
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and
effectively connect more components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
the corresponding component by using the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on
the remote control).
Optical Output
Component Video
I/O Assignment
HDMI
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Example 1: Assigning the COAXIAL 1 CD jack to
the DVD input.
1
Select “Input Select” in the GUI screen and
then select “DVD”.
2
Select “I/O Assignment” and then “Coaxial
Input”.
3
Select “1 CD”.
Example 2: Clearing a jack assignment.
1
Select “Input Select” and then select the
desired input source (“DVD”, etc.).
2
Select “I/O Assignment” and then select the
desired jack assignment (“Coaxial Input”,
“Optical Input”, “Optical Output”,
“Component Video”, or “HDMI”).
3
Select “None” and then press ENTER to clear
the assignment.
■ Audio Select (Audio input jack select)
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can
select the type of input signal you want to use.
Choices: Auto, HDMI, Coax/Opt, Analog
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Auto
Decoder Mode
HDMI
Volume Trim
Coax/Opt
• Select “Auto” when you want signals to be input to this
unit in the following order: HDMI signals, digital
signals and analog signals.
• Select “HDMI” when you only want HDMI signals to
be input to this unit. If no HDMI signals are input, no
sound is output.
• Select “Coax/Opt” when you want digital signals to be
input to this unit at the OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks.
Use if HDMI signals are also being input.
• Select “Analog” when you only want analog signals to
be input to this unit. If no analog signals are input, no
sound is output.
y
• You can also select the audio input jack by pressing AUDIO
SELECT on the front panel (or AUDIO SEL on the remote
control). See page 42 for details.
• You can set the default Audio input jack select of this unit by
using “Audio Select” in “Option” (see page 114).
Note
This feature is not available when no digital input jack
(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,
“HDMI” is not available as an Audio input jack select setting
when the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 and HDMI IN 3 jacks are not
used. Use “I/O Assignment” in “Input Select” to reassign the
respective input jack (see page 96).
■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)
Use this feature to switch the input mode. You can
designate the reassigned digital input jacks (see page 96)
for specific audio signals (DTS, etc.).
Choices: Auto, DTS
I/O Assignment
Notes
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the
COAXIAL jack.
96 En
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Auto
Volume Trim
DTS
Rename
• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
• Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the
input mode.
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Multi CH Assign
(Multi channel assignment)
Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input
into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a
source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. If you input 8-channel signals from an external
decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional
front signals.
Manual Setup (Sound)
Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
MENU
SRCH MODE
Volume Trim
TV
Rename
Multi CH Assign
Input Channels
BGV
Front Input
2
Press k / n on the remote control to select
“Manual Setup” and then press h.
PRESET/CH
Input Channels (Input channels)
This setting is used to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder.
Choices: 6ch, 8ch
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Note
If “Zone2 Amplifier” (page 113) is set to “INT:[SP1]”,
“INT:[SP2]” or “INT:Both”, no sound is output from the surround
back speakers even if you select “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch”
and set the output setting of the external component to 6 channels.
3
Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
select “Sound” and then press h.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
■ BGV (Back ground video)
LFE Level
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
Rename
DVR/VCR 2
Multi CH Assign
V-AUX
BGV
Last
Off
Dynamic Range
4
Sound
Parametric EQ
Video
Tone Control
Basic
Audio Option
Select the desired parameters and then press
h to access and adjust.
PRESET/CH
Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
V-AUX, Last, Off
• Select “Last” to set this unit to automatically select the
last selected video source as the background video
source.
• Select “Off” to set this unit not to play the video source
in the background.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
97 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
Front Input (Front input)
If you selected “8ch” in Input Channels, you can select
analog jacks at which front signals from an external
decoder will be input.
Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,
V-AUX, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)
■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the
LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the
capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE
channel carries low-frequency special effects which are
only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only
when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Control range: –20.0 to 0.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer of each
speaker.
0.0dB
Speaker
LFE Level
Dynamic Range
Front R
Press h to access the settings window.
Note
Depending on the settings of “LFE Level”, some signals may not
be output at the SUBWOOFER jack.
■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard),
MIN (minimum)
STD
Front L
Audio Option
2
Headphone (Headphone low-frequency effect
level)
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
MAX
Tone Control
Press k / n / l / h to select Test Tone or the
speaker you want to adjust.
• Select “Test Tone” to choose whether turns on or
off the test tone output when adjusting the tonal
quality of each speaker.
• Select “Front L” to adjust the tonal quality of the
front left speaker.
• Select “Front R” to adjust the tonal quality of the
front right speaker.
• Select “Center” to adjust the tonal quality of the
center speaker.
• Select “Surround L” to adjust the tonal quality of
the surround left speaker.
• Select “Surround R” to adjust the tonal quality of
the surround right speaker.
• Select “Surround Back L” to adjust the tonal
quality of the surround back left speaker.
• Select “Surround Back R” to adjust the tonal
quality of the surround back right speaker.
• Select “Presence L” to adjust the tonal quality of
the presence left speaker.
• Select “Presence R” to adjust the tonal quality of
the presence right speaker.
• Select “Subwoofer” to adjust the tonal quality of
the subwoofer.
Speaker (Speaker low-frequency effect level)
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone
Test Tone
1
Headphone
Speaker
Parametric EQ
MIN
PARAM
Test Tone
Speaker (Speaker dynamic range)
Select to adjust the speaker compression.
Front L
Front R
Headphone (Headphone dynamic range)
Select to adjust the headphone compression.
• Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of
dynamic range.
• Select “STD” for general use.
• Select “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume
levels.
RESET
EDIT
EXIT
Band / Gain
Center
3
Press k / n / l / h to select “PARAM” and
then press ENTER to select a parameter from
“Band” (band), “Freq.” (frequency) or “Q” (Q
factor).
y
You cam adjust the gain with any parameter.
98 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
4
Press n to select “EDIT” and press ENTER to
access the edit window.
Test Tone
Band
Gain
Freq.
Q
Control (Tone control)
Choices: Speakers, Headphones
#1
0.0dB
125.0Hz
1.000
Control
Speakers
Front L
Bass
Headphones
Front R
Treble
Center
The parameter selected in “PARAM” is highlighted.
• Press l / h to adjust the parameter.
• Press k / n to adjust the “Gain”.
• Press ENTER to exit the edit window.
y
• When you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu
as a graphic equalizer.
• The “Band #1” and “Band #2” can adjust the frequencies
below of 198.4 Hz.
• When you select “Subwoofer” in step 1 and “Band” in
step 3, you can adjust “Band #1” and “Band #2” only.
• For more information on the parametric equalizer, see
page 98.
5
y
“Speaker” and “Headphone” adjustments are stored
independently. The adjustments for “Speaker” affects the
front left/right, center, presence left/right speaker channels
and Subwoofer channel.
Bass (Bass control)
Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: 125Hz, 350Hz, 500Hz
Control range: – 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Speaker
Freq : 350Hz
Gain : 0.0dB
y
If you want to reset all “Parametric EQ” parameter settings
for the selected speaker, select “RESET” and press ENTER.
6
Select “EXIT” and press ENTER to exit the
settings window.
■ Tone Control (Tone control)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble
output to your speakers or headphones.
Choices: Control, Bass, Treble, Audio Bypass
Note
Tone Control is not effective when:
– PURE DIRECT (see page 52) is selected.
– MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
Control
Bass
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied
with the results.
• Select “Speakers” to adjust the bass/treble balance of
your speakers.
• Select “Headphones” to adjust the bass/treble balance
of your headphones.
+6
Treble
+0
Audio Bypass
-6
Treble (Treble control)
Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz, 8.0kHz
Control range: – 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Speaker
Freq : 3.5kHz
Gain : 0.0dB
Control
Bass
Treble
Auto Bypass
+6
+0
-6
99 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Auto Bypass (Auto bypass)
Use this feature to select whether the audio output
bypasses the tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and
“BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 52).
Choices: Auto, Off
Audio Delay (Audio delay)
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors, projectors or high definition
monitors.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Bass
Treble
Auto Bypass
Auto
Muting Type
Off
Audio Delay
0ms
Max Volume
Initial Volume
• Select “AUTO” if you want the signals to bypass the
tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal
possible.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want the signals to bypass
the tone control circuitry.
■ Audio Option (Audio options)
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
Muting Type (Muting type)
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume.
Choices: Full, –20dB
Max Volume (Maximum volume)
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected
laud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume
range is 16.5 dB to –80.0 dB. However, when “Max
Volume” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes
–5.0 dB to –80.0 dB.
Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to –30.0 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
Muting Type
Audio Delay
Max Volume
+16.5dB
Initial Volume
Muting Type
Full
Audio Delay
-20dB
Max Volume
• Select “Full” to completely mute all the audio output.
• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Notes
• When a test tone is output, the “Max Volume” setting is
automatically deactivated because the volume level is
automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “Max
Volume” setting.
• The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the “Initial
Volume” setting (see page 100). For example, “Initial Volume”
is set to –20.0 dB and then “Max Volume” is set to –30.0 dB,
the volume level is automatically set to -30.0 dB when you turn
on the power of this unit next time.
Initial Volume (Initial volume)
Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone
when the power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off, –80 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Audio Delay
Max Volume
Initial Volume
100 En
Off
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Manual Setup (Video)
Note
The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the “Initial
Volume” setting. Therefore, Initial Volume cannot be set beyond
the existing “Max Volume” setting.
■ Channel Mute (Channel mute)
Use this menu to adjust the video parameters.
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
Use this feature to mute specific speaker channels.
AMP
Mode (Mode)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the “Channel
Mute” setting for each speaker.
Choices: Off, On
SET MENU
SOURCE
2
Presence R
MENU
SRCH MODE
TV
Press k / n on the remote control to select
“Manual Setup” and then press h.
Subwoofer
Mode
Off
Front L
On
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
Front R
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
• Select “Off” to deactivate the “Channel Mute” settings.
• Select “On” to activate the “Channel Mute” settings.
Each speaker settings
Choices: Mute, Off
3
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
Mode
Front L
Mute
Front R
Off
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Center
• Select “Mute” to mute the selected speaker channel.
• Select “Off” not to mute the selected speaker channel.
• “Front L” sets whether to mute the audio output from
the front left speaker.
• “Front R” sets whether to mute the audio output from
the front right speaker.
• “Center” sets whether to mute the audio output from
the center speaker.
• “Surround L” sets whether to mute the audio output
from the surround left speaker.
• “Surround R” sets whether to mute the audio output
from the surround right speaker.
• “Surround Back L” sets whether to mute the audio
output from the surround back left speaker.
• “Surround Back R” sets whether to mute the audio
output from the surround back right speaker.
• “Presence L” sets whether to mute the audio output
from the presence left speaker.
• “Presence R” sets whether to mute the audio output
from the presence right speaker.
• “Subwoofer” sets whether to mute the audio output
from the subwoofer.
Sound
4
Video
Conversion
Basic
Component I/P
NET/USB
HDMI Up-Scaling
Select the desired parameters and then press
h to access and adjust.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
101 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Subwoofer
Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
select “Video” and then press h.
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Note
Use the “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the
parameters in “Manual Setup (Video)” (except “Short Message”
and “On Screen”) to the factory presets (see page 136).
■ Conversion (Video conversion)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the video
conversion as well as the HDMI up-conversion of the
analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video
and component video jacks.
Choices: Off, On
■ Component I/P
(Component interlace/progressive
conversion)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog
interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video
signals input at the composite video, S-video and
component video jacks so that the analog video signals
deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p
are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.
Choices: Off, On
Conversion
Off
Conversion
On
Component I/P
Off
HDMI Up-Scaling
On
HDMI Aspect
Component I/P
HDMI Up-Scaling
• Select “Off” to deactivate the video conversion as well
as the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video
signals.
• Select “On” to activate the video conversion as well as
the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video signals.
Notes
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line
video signals interchangeably.
• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i
(PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite
video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted to component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• Even when “Conversion” is set to “On”, HDMI digital signals
are not converted to analog video signals.
• If “Conversion” is set to “Off”, the “Component I/P” and
“HDMI Up-Scaling” features are deactivated.
• Set “Conversion” to “On” to display the short message display.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “Conversion” to “Off”.
• When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a
game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals
even if you “Conversion” to “On”.
• When the analog component video signals with 480p of
resolution are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and the
video monitor is connected to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT or
S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, the GUI screen is
not displayed on the video monitor.
102 En
• Select “On” to activate the analog interlace/progressive
up-conversion of the analog video signals.
• Select “Off” to deactivate the analog interlace/
progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.
Notes
• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the GUI
screen if “Conversion” is set to “Off”.
• If your video monitor does not support analog video signals
with 480p/576p of resolution, the GUI screen may not be
displayed on your video monitor when “Component I/P” is set
to “On”. Use “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the
“Component I/P” parameter to the factory preset setting (see
page 136).
■ HDMI Up-Scaling (HDMI up-scaling)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI upconversion of the analog video signals input at the
composite video, S-video and component video jacks so
that the up-scaled analog video signals are output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
This unit up-scales the analog video signals as follows:
• 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p/576p, 1080i or
720p
• 480p/576p → 1080i or 720p
Choices: Through, 480p (or 576p), 1080i, 720p
Conversion
Component I/P
Through
HDMI Up-Scaling
480p
HDMI Aspect
1080i
Short Message
720p
• Select “Through” not to up-scale any analog video
signals.
• Select “480p” (or “576p”), “1080i” or “720p” to upscale analog video signals to 480p or 576p, 1080i or
720p of resolution.
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Short Message (Short message display)
Notes
• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the GUI
menu if “Conversion” is set to “Off” (see page 102).
• When you set “TV FORMAT” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to
“NTSC” (see page 136), “480p” appears in the choices of
“HDMI Up-Scaling”, and when you set “TV FORMAT” to
“PAL”, “576p” appears in the choices of “HDMI Up-Scaling”.
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message
display function.
Choices: Off, On
HDMI Up-Scaling
HDMI Aspect
Off
■ HDMI Aspect (HDMI aspect ratio)
Short Message
On
Use this feature to select the adjustment of aspect ratio for
HDMI video signal sources.
Choices: Through, 16:9 Normal, Smart Zoom
On Screen
Component I/P
HDMI Up-Scaling
HDMI Aspect
Through
Short Message
16:9 Normal
On Screen
Smart Zoom
Position
• Select “On” to activate the short message display
function. The contents of the front panel display appear
at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this
unit.
• Select “Off” to deactivate the short message display
function.
Note
Notes
• When “HDMI Up-Scaling” is set to “Through”, you cannot
make any adjustments to “HDMI Aspect”.
• When “HDMI Aspect” is set to “Smart Zoom”, the video
images of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.
• When the video signals are input at HDMI IN jacks or the
signals are input with 720p or 1080i of resolution, the setting of
“HDMI Aspect” does not affect the video signals output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
■ On Screen (On-screen display time)
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
XM Satellite Radio information, iPod or NET/USB menu
on the video monitor after you perform a certain
operation.
Choices: Always, 10sec, 30sec
HDMI Aspect
Always
Short Message
10sec
On Screen
30sec
Position
Wall Paper
• Select “Always” to display the menu screen
unceasingly during an operation.
• Select “10sec” to turn off the menu screen 10 seconds
after you perform a certain operation.
• Select “30sec” to turn off the menu screen 30 seconds
after you perform a certain operation.
103 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• Select “Through” if you do not make any adjustments
to the aspect ratio for HDMI video signal sources.
• Select “16:9 Normal” to display video images with 4:3
of aspect ratio on your video monitor with 16:9 of
aspect ratio. Black stripes appear on the right and left
sides as a result.
• Select “Smart Zoom” to fit video images with 4:3 of
aspect ratio to your video monitor with 16:9 of aspect
ratio.
The short message display does not appear in the following cases:
– when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p
resolutions are input
– When HDMI video signals are input
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Position (GUI screen position)
Use this feature to adjust the vertical and horizontal
position of the GUI screen.
Control range: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)
Manual Setup (Basic)
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker setting.
1
Short Message
/ :+5
/ :-5
On Screen
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
AMP
+
Position
SET MENU
SOURCE
MENU
Wall Paper
SRCH MODE
TV
• Press k to raise the position of the GUI display.
• Press n to lower the position of the GUI display.
• Press h to shift the position of the GUI display to the
right.
• Press l to shift the position of the GUI display to the left.
2
Press k / n on the remote control to select
“Manual Setup” and then press h.
■ Wall Paper (Wall paper)
On Screen
Wall Paper
Yes
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
3
None
ENTER
ENTER
Use this feature to display the wall paper or gray
background in your video monitor when there is no video
signal being input.
Choices: None, Yes, Gray
Position
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
select “Basic” and then press h.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
Gray
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
• Select “None” not to display any background in your
video monitor.
• Select “Yes” to display a background image (the
photograph of a piano) in your monitor when there is
no video signal being input.
• Select “Gray” to display a gray background in your
monitor when there is no video signal being input.
A/B/C/D/E
Sound
Video
Test Tone
Basic
Speaker Set
NET/USB
Speaker Distance
Option
Speaker Level
Note
When “Conversion” is set to “Off”, no background is displayed
even if “Wall Paper” is set to “Yes”.
4
Select the desired parameters and then press
h to access and adjust.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
104 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
y
• Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set
automatically when you run “Auto Setup”. You can use the
basic menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend
running “Auto Setup” first.
• You can reset these parameters by performing the “Auto Setup”
procedure (see page 35).
Front (Front speakers)
Choices: Large, Small
■ Test Tone (Test tone)
Turns the test tone output on or off for “Speaker Set”,
“Speaker Distance” and “Speaker Level” settings.
Choices: Off, On
Test Tone
Off
Speaker Set
On
Speaker Distance
y
If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s
length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening
position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,
calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.
Notes
■ Speaker Set (Speaker settings)
Large
Center
Small
Surround
• Select “Large” (large) if you have large front speakers
that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All
the front left and right channel signals are directed to
the front left and right speakers.
• Select “Small” (small) if you have small front speakers
that do not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left
and right channels are directed to the speakers selected
in “Bass Out” (see page 107).
Notes
• When “Bass Out” is set to “Front” (see page 107), the LFE
signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the
low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” are all
directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the
“FRONT SP” setting.
• When “Bass Out” is set to “Front” (see page 107), you can
select only “Large” in “Front”. If the value of “Front” is set to
other than “Large” in advance, this unit change the value to
“Large” automatically.
Center (Center speaker)
Choices: Large, Small, None
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
Test Tone
Front
Large
Center
Small
Speaker Set
Front
Surround
None
Speaker Distance
Center
Surround Back
Speaker Level
Surround
y
• If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
• When the diameter of the woofer section of the speaker unit is
larger than 16 cm (6.5 in), set the correspondent speaker setting
parameter to “Large”.
• Select “Large” (large) if you have a large center
speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals
effectively. All the center channel signals are directed
to the center speaker.
• Select “Small” (small) if you have a small center
speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected in “Bass
Out”.
• Select “None” (none) if you did not connect a center
speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the
front left and right speakers.
105 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this
case, make sure no children are present in the listening room.
• If you select “On” and enter the “Speaker Set”, “Speaker Level”
or “Speaker Distance” menu, the test tone is output from the
selected speakers.
Front
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Surround (Surround left/right speakers)
Choices: Large, Small, None
Surround Back (Surround back left/right
speakers)
Choices: Large x1, Small x1, Small x2, Large x2, None
Front
Center
Large
Center
Surround
Small
Surround
Large x1
Surround Back
None
Surround Back
Small x1
Presence
Small x2
Bass Out
Large x2
Presence
• Select “Large” (large) if you have large surround left
and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are
directed to the surround left and right speakers.
• Select “Small” (small) if you have small surround left
and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the
surround left and right channels are directed to the
speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select “None” (none) if you did not connect surround
speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 51) and “Surround Back” is
automatically set to “None”.
• Select “Large x1” (large x 1) if you have a large
surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround back left and right
channel signals are directed to the surround back left
speaker.
• Select “Small x1” (small x 1) if you have a small
surround back speaker that does not reproduce lowfrequency signals effectively. The low-frequency
signals of the surround back left and right channels are
directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”
and the rest of the signals are directed to the surround
back left speaker.
• Select “Small x2” (small x 2) if you have two small
surround back speakers that do not reproduce lowfrequency signals effectively. The low-frequency
signals of the surround back left and right channels are
directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select “Large x2” (large x 2) if you have two large
surround back speakers that reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround back left and right
channel signals are directed to the surround back left
and right speakers.
• Select “None” (none) if you did not connect surround
back speakers. The surround back channel signals are
directed to the surround left and right speakers.
Presence (Presence speakers)
Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers
connected to this unit.
Choices: Yes, None
Surround
Surround Back
Presence
None
Bass Out
Yes
Bass Cross Over
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect presence
speakers.
• Select “YES” (yes) if you connected presence speakers
and want to use them.
106 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Bass Out (Bass out)
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: Both, SWFR, Front
Surround Back
SWFR Phase (Subwoofer Phase)
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choices: Normal, Reverse
Bass Out
Presence
Bass Cross Over
Bass Out
Both
SWFR Phase
Normal
Bass Cross Over
SWFR
PR/SB Priority
Reverse
SWFR Phase
Front
Notes
Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over)
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “Small” or to “None” in “Speaker Set” (see
pages 105 and 106). All frequencies below the selected
frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers
set to “Large” in “Speaker Set” (see pages 105 and 106).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Presence
40Hz
Bass Out
60Hz
Bass Cross Over
80Hz
SWFR Phase
90Hz
PR/SB Priority
100Hz
PR/SB Priority
(Presence/surround back speaker priority)
Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the
surround back speakers when playing sources that contain
surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP
sound field programs.
Choices: Presence, Surround Back
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
Presence
PR/SB Priority
Surround Back
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• Select “Both” (both) if you connected a subwoofer.
The low-frequency signals of any source are output
from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the
low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “Small”
are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency
signals of the front left and right channels are directed
to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer
regardless of the “Front” setting (see page 107).
• Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a
subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” are
directed to the subwoofer.
• Select “Front” (front) if you did not connect a
subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals
of the front left and right channels, and the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” are
all directed to the front left and right speakers
regardless of the “Front” setting (see page 107).
• Select “Normal” if you do not want to reverse the
phase of your subwoofer.
• Select “Reverse” to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
• Select “Presence” to use the presence speakers even
when surround back channel signals are input. The
signals for the surround back channel will be output
from the surround speakers.
• Select “Surround Back” to use the surround back
speakers when surround back channel signals are
detected in a CINEMA DSP program. The presence
channel signals are output from the front speakers.
107 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance)
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Test Tone
Subwoofer
Speaker Set
Unit
Speaker Distance
Front L
Speaker Level
Front R
Center
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Initial setting:
Front L/Front R/Subwoofer/Presence L/
Presence R/Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)
Surround L/Surround R/Surround Back L/
Surround Back R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
Control step: 0.1 m (0.5 ft)
• Select “Front L” to adjust the distance of the front left
speaker.
• Select “Front R” to adjust the distance of the front right
speaker.
• Select “Center” to adjust the distance of the center
speaker.
• Select “Surround L” to adjust the distance of the
surround left speaker.
• Select “Surround R” to adjust the distance of the
surround right speaker.
• Select “Surround Back L” to adjust the distance of the
surround back left speaker.
• Select “Surround Back R” to adjust the distance of the
surround back right speaker.
• Select “Presence L” to adjust the distance of the
presence left speaker.
• Select “Presence R” to adjust the distance of the
presence right speaker.
• Select “Subwoofer” to adjust the distance of the
subwoofer.
108 En
Notes
• You cannot adjust the distance of speakers set to “None” in
Speaker Set.
• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the
distance in “Surround Back L”.
• “Center”, “Surround L”, “Surround R”, “Surround Back L”,
“Surround Back R”, “Subwoofer”, “Presence L” and “Presence
R” cannot be adjusted if “Center” (see page 105), “Surround”
(see page 106), “Surround Back” (see page 106), “Bass Out”
(see page 107) and “Presence” (see page 106) are set to “None”
respectively.
• Instead of “Surround Back L” and “Surround Back R”,
“Surround Back” is displayed if “Surround Back” is set to either
“Small x1” or “Large x1” (see page 106).
Unit (Unit)
Selects the unit for displaying the values of “Speaker
Distance” parameter.
Choices: Meter (m), Feet (ft)
Initial setting:Feet (U.S.A. and Canada models)
Meter (Other models)
Presence R
Subwoofer
Unit
Meter
Front L
Feet
Front R
• Select “Meter” to input speaker distances in meters.
• Select “Feet” to input speaker distances in feet.
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Speaker Level (Speaker level)
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 105).
Speaker Set
Presence R
Speaker Distance
Subwoofer
Speaker Level
Front L
Manual Setup (NET/USB)
Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system
parameters.
Video
Basic
Front R
NET/USB
Network
Option
Play Style
Center
Notes
• You cannot adjust the level of channels set to “None” in
Speaker Set.
• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the balance
in “Surround Back L”.
■ Network (Network settings)
Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP
address, etc.) or to change them manually.
Network
DHCP
Play Style
IP Address
Information
Subnet Mask
Note
The above display is an example.
DHCP (DHCP setting)
When this parameter is set to “ON”, network parameters
for “IP Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Default Gateway”,
“DNS Server (P)” and “DNS Server (S)” obtained from a
DHCP enabled router are displayed. If DHCP server
function is not available, set this parameter to “Off” to
configure the network parameters manually.
Choices: On, Off
IP Address (IP address)
Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to
this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for
other devices in the target network.
Subnet Mask (Subnet mask)
Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value
assigned to this unit.
y
For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as
“255.255.255.0”.
Default Gateway (Default gateway)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default
gateway.
109 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting:
Front L/Front R/Subwoofer/Presence L/
Presence R/Subwoofer: 0.0 dB
CENTER/Surround L/Surround R/Surround Back L/
Surround Back R: –1.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
• Select “Front L” to adjust the balance of the front left
speaker.
• Select “Front R” to adjust the balance of the front right
speaker.
• Select “Center” to adjust the balance of the center
speaker.
• Select “Surround L” to adjust the balance of the
surround left speaker.
• Select “Surround R” to adjust the balance of the
surround right speaker.
• Select “Surround Back L” to adjust the balance of the
surround back left speaker.
• Select “Surround Back R” to adjust the balance of the
surround back right speaker.
• Select “Presence L” to adjust the balance of the
presence left speaker.
• Select “Presence R” to adjust the balance of the
presence right speaker.
• Select “Subwoofer” to adjust the balance of the
subwoofer.
Information
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
DNS Server (P) (Primary DNS server)
DNS Server (S) (Secondary DNS server)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary
and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.
■ Play Style (Playback styles)
Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to
your preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order
or repeat one specific song or a sequence of songs.
Note
Network
If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in
“DNS Server (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter
one of them in “DNS Server (P)” and another in
“DNS Server (S)”.
Setup (Setup)
Select “Setup” to confirm the settings of the “Network”
parameters.
1
Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
and then press h to select and enter the
desired network parameter.
Note
When “DHCP” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust
any other network settings. To specify the other parameters,
you need to first set “DHCP” to “OFF”.
2
To specify the parameter, press k / n repeatedly
to change the number and press l / h to select
the digit to change.
3
Press ENTER to confirm the parameter.
4
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to configure each
network parameter.
5
Select “Setup” and then press ENTER to
finish configuration.
Note
In case you have changed your network configuration, you may
need to reconfigure the network settings again.
y
You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory
settings by using “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu (see
page 136).
110 En
Play Style
Repeat
Information
Shuffle
Repeat (Repeat)
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, Single, All
• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Single” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
Notes
• When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” or
“ ” appears in the top right corner of the playback status
screen while one song or a sequence of songs are being
repeated.
• If “Repeat” is set to “Single”, the setting will be reset to “Off”
when the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off.
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
Choices: Off, On
• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “On” to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
Note
When “Shuffle” is set to “On”, “
” appears in the top right
corner of the playback status screen while songs or albums are
being shuffled.
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Information (Network information)
Use this feature to display the network system
information.
Network
Play Style
Information
MAC Address
00:00:00:00:00:00
Status
100 BASE-TX
Full Duplex
Manual Setup (Option)
This menu adjusts the optional system settings.
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
System
ABCDE123
Note
The above display is an example.
TV
2
MAC Address
(MAC (Media Access Control) address)
This information displays the MAC address that is
assigned to this unit.
Status (Network status)
This information displays the current link status of the
network.
Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
Full Duplex, Half Duplex, No Link
MENU
SRCH MODE
Press k / n on the remote control to select
“Manual Setup” and then press h.
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
3
Note
A/B/C/D/E
Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
select “Option” and then press h.
System (System ID)
This information displays the system ID that is assigned to
this unit.
ENTER
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
Video
Front Panel Disp.
Basic
iPod
Option
Zone OSD
Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set
4
Select the desired parameters and then press
h to access and adjust.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
111 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
PRESET/CH
PRESET/CH
“No Link” appears when network connection is not made.
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Front Panel Disp.
(Front panel display setting)
■ Zone OSD (on-screen display)
Dimmer (Dimmer)
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: – 4 to 0
0
Dimmer
Scroll
Use this feature to display the operational status of Zone 2
as well as Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video monitor connected
to the ZONE VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
The Zone 2 and Zone 3 information to be displayed is
listed as follows:
• The input source of Zone 2 and Zone 3
• The volume level of Zone 2 and Zone 3
• The audio mute status of Zone 2 and Zone 3
• The tonal quality status of Zone 2 and Zone 3
• The XM Satellite Radio information when XM is
selected as the input source of Zone 2 and Zone 3
Choices: Off, Zone2, Zone2&Zone3
Scroll (Front panel display message scroll)
Use this feature to set whether to display the information
(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel
display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once
when “XM”, “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is selected as the
input source.
Choices: Continue, Once
Dimmer
Scroll
Continue
Once
Front Panel Disp.
Off
iPod
Zone2
Zone OSD
Zone2&Zone3
Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set
• Select “Off” not to display any operational status of
Zone 2 and Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video monitor.
• Select “Zone2” to display the operational status of
Zone 2 only on the Zone 2 video monitor.
• Select “Zone2&Zone3” to display the operational
status of Zone 2 and Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video
monitor.
Notes
• Select “Continue” to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
• Select “Once” to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
■ iPod (iPod settings)
Standby Charge
(iPod Charge on the standby mode)
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the
battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the
standby mode (see page 75).
Choices: Off, Auto
Off
Standby Charge
Auto
• Select “Off” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod
only when this unit is turned on.
• Select “Auto” to charge the battery of the stationed
iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby
mode.
112 En
• If “Zone OSD” is set to “Zone2&Zone3”, changes to the
operational status of Zone 3 is displayed on the Zone 2 video
monitor. For example, if the input source of Zone 3 is changed
while you are watching TV in Zone 2, the name of the changed
input source of Zone 3 is displayed on your TV in Zone 2.
• If “Zone OSD” is set to “Zone2&Zone3”, the display contents
of Zone 2 and Zone 3 depends on whether or not Zone 2 and
Zone 3 are turned on with ZONE 2 ON/OFF and ZONE 3 ON/
OFF on the front panel (see page 131).
– If both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on, the video signals of
the current input source of Zone 2 and the corresponding OSD
are displayed on the Zone 2 video monitor.
– If Zone 2 is turned off and Zone 3 is turned on, only the
corresponding OSD is displayed in the gray background
regardless of the REC OUT/ZONE 2 status on the front panel.
– If Zone 2 is turned on and Zone 3 is turned off, the video
signals of the current input source of Zone 2 and the
corresponding OSD are displayed on the Zone 2 video
monitor.
– If both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off, no video signals and
no OSD are displayed on the Zone 2 video monitor.
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set
(Zone 2/Zone 3 setting)
Zone2 Amplifier/Zone3 Amplifier
(Zone 2/Zone 3 amplifier)
Use to select how the Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 speakers are
amplified.
Choices: EXT, INT:[SP1], INT:[SP2], INT:Both
Zone2 Volume/Zone3 Volume
(Zone 2/Zone 3 volume)
Use this feature to select how the volume control will
operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3
OUTPUT jacks.
Choices: Fixed, Variable
Zone2 Amplifier
Fixed
Zone2 Volume
Variable
Zone2 Max Vol.
Zone2 Amplifier
EXT
Zone2 Volume
INT:[SP1]
Zone2 Max Vol.
INT:[SP2]
Zone2 Initial Vol.
Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol.
(Zone 2/Zone 3 Maximum volume)
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to – 30.0 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• Select “EXT” if you want to connect your Zone 2 or
Zone 3 speakers through an external amplifier
connected to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3
OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “INT:[SP1]” to use the internal surround back
amplifier of this unit when you want to connect your
Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 speaker
terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “INT:[SP2]” to use the internal surround
amplifier of this unit when you want to connect your
Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP2 speaker
terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “INT:Both” to use the internal surround and
surround back amplifiers of this unit when you want to
connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to
both the SP1 and the SP2 speaker terminals on the rear
panel of this unit.
• Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume
level to a standard line level.
• Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT
volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote
control.
Zone2 Amplifier
Zone2 Volume
Zone2 Max Vol.
+16.5dB
Zone2 Initial Vol.
Notes
• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
menu, “INT:[SP1]”, “INT:[SP2]” and “INT:Both” cannot be
selected.
• When “INT:Both” is selected for “ZONE2 AMP”, only “EXT”
can be selected for “ZONE3 AMP”.
• When “INT:Both” is selected for “ZONE3 AMP”, only “EXT”
can be selected for “ZONE2 AMP”.
• When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to
“INT:[SP1]” or “INT:[SP2]” and the corresponding zone is
turned on, no sound is output from the surround back speakers.
• When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to
“INT:Both” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound
is output from both the surround speakers and the surround back
speakers in the main zone.
• When both “ZONE2 AMP” and “ZONE3 AMP” are set to
“INT:[SP1]” or “INT:[SP2]” and Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned
on, no sound is output from both the surround speakers and the
surround back speakers in the main zone.
• When you use internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3, some
surround field programs may not work in the same way as when
you do not use the internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Note
The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes priority
over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.” setting. For
example, “Zone2 Initial Vol.” is set to –20.0 dB and then “Zone2
Max Vol.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set
to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time.‘
113 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol.
(Zone 2/Zone 3 Initial volume)
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone
3 when the power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off, –80 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
■ Audio Select
(Default Audio input jack select)
Use this feature to designate the default Audio input jack
select setting when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choices: Auto, Last
Zone3 Set
Zone2 Volume
Sur.Initialize
Zone2 Max Vol.
Zone2 Initial Vol.
Off
Audio Select
Auto
Decoder Mode
Last
Memory Guard
Note
The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes priority
over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.” setting.
■ Sur.Initialize (Surround initialize)
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound
field program within sound field program groups. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
settings.
Adjusted sound field parameter settings are displayed in
blue.
Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB,
ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO,
SUR. DECODE, All
Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set
Sur.Initialize
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAINMENT
MOVIE
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
All
• Press k / n / l / h to select the sound field program
you want to initialize and then press ENTER.
• Select “All” to initialize settings for all sound field
program parameters.
• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate Audio input jack select setting.
• Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last selected Audio input jack select setting
used for the connected input source.
■ Decoder Mode (Default decoder mode)
You can select the decoder used by this unit.
Choices: Auto, Last
Sur. Initialize
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Auto
Memory Guard
Last
HDMI Set
• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
decoder.
• Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last decoder used for the connected source.
■ Memory Guard (Memory Guard)
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: Off, On
Audio Select
Note
Sound field program groups cannot be initialized when “Memory
Guard” is set to “On” (see page 114).
Decoder Mode
Memory Guard
Off
HDMI Set
On
Select “On” to protect:
• DSP program parameters
• All menu items except “Memory Guard” and “System
Memory” – “Load”.
• The start and reload of the “Auto Setup” procedure.
114 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
y
When you select the protected parameter, “ ” appears at the
bottom left of the GUI screen.
■ HDMI Set (HDMI settings)
Use this feature to adjust the HDMI support audio.
Decoder Mode
Memory Guard
HDMI Set
Support Audio
System Memory
Use this feature to save up to six of your favorite settings
that can be easily recalled when needed. You can save
settings such as the following:
• Sound field program parameters
• Speaker settings
• Speaker channel settings
• LFE level
• Dynamic range settings
• Parametric equalizer settings
■ To save settings
Support Audio (Support audio)
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI
audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component
connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this
unit.
Choices: RX-V2700, Other
1
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
TV
RX-V2700
Other
Press k / n / l / h on the remote control
repeatedly to select “System Memory” and
then press h.
3 Select “Save” and then press ENTER.
The display of the current settings appears in the GUI
screen.
Sci-Fi
Current
Memory 1
SpeakerCH
LFE Level
D-Range
PEQ
3/4/0.1
0dB
MAX
YPAO Natural
Memory 2
Note
The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or
HDMI IN 3 jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT
jack of this unit.
4
Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
to select the desired memory number to save
the current settings of this unit and then
press h.
“Save: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of
the window.
5
Press ENTER to save the current settings of
this unit.
115 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• Select “RX-V2700” to play back HDMI audio signals
on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the
HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the
rear panel of this unit.
• Select “Other” to play back HDMI audio signals on
another HDMI component connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
MENU
SRCH MODE
2
Support Audio
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ To load settings
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
MENU
SRCH MODE
Signal Info.
(Input signal information)
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
TV
1
2
Press k / n / l / h on the remote control
repeatedly to select “System Memory” and
then press h.
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
The top display appears.
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
3
MENU
SRCH MODE
Select “Load” and then press ENTER.
TV
Sci-Fi
Current
SpeakerCH
LFE Level
D-Range
PEQ
Memory 1
Memory 2
3/4/0.1
0dB
MAX
Reset
Memory 3
4
5
Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
to select the desired memory number to load
and then press h.
“Load: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of
the window.
2
Stereo/Surround
Sound
Input Select
Video
Manual Setup
Basic
Auto Setup
NET/USB
System Memory
Option
Press k / n repeatedly to select “Signal
Info.”.
The audio information about the input source appears
in the GUI screen.
Press ENTER to load settings.
PRESET/CH
y
“Memory 1” and “Memory 2” settings can be recalled simply by
pressing MEMORY 1 or MEMORY 2 on the remote control.
When you press MEMORY 1, “Load Memory 1? Yes:Press
Again” appears in the GUI and “Press MEMORY1!” appears in
the front panel display. Press MEMORY 1 once more to recall the
settings.
1 MEMORY 2
9
0
When you press MEMORY 2, “Load Memory 2? Yes:Press
Again” appears in the GUI and “Press MEMORY2!” appears in
the front panel display. Press MEMORY 2 once more to recall the
settings.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
3
Press l / h repeatedly to select “Audio
Info.” or “Video Info.”.
Auto Setup
System Memory
Signal Info.
PRESET/CH
Language
Audio Info.
Video
Format
--Sampling 48kHz
Channel
???
Bitrate
--Dialogue
--Flag1
--Flag2
---
1 MEMORY 2
9
0
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
Auto Setup
System Memory
Signal Info.
Language
116 En
Video Info.
Audio
HDMI Signal
----HDMI Resolution
----Analog Resolution
480i
480i
HDMI Error
---
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Audio information
Format (Signal format)
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital
signal, it automatically switches to analog input.
Note
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals.
Sampling (Sampling frequency)
The number of samples per second taken from a
continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
Note
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling
frequency.
Language
Use this feature to select the language of the menu items
and messages that appears in the GUI (graphical user
interface) screen of this unit.
Choices: English (English),
(Japanese),
Français (French), Deutsch (German),
Español (Spanish), Русский (Russian)
y
You can also select the GUI language using the “GUI
LANGUAGE” parameter in “ADVANCED SETUP” in the front
panel display (see page 136).
1
Channel (Input channel)
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround
channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
The top display appears.
AMP
SET MENU
SOURCE
MENU
SRCH MODE
TV
Note
“---” appears when there is no source channel available.
Bitrate (Bit rate)
The number of bits passing a given point per second.
Sound
Input Select
Video
Manual Setup
Basic
Auto Setup
NET/USB
System Memory
Option
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Note
Stereo/Surround
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate.
Dialogue
(Dialogue normalization level)
The dialogue normalization level preset to the current
input Dolby Digital and DTS signal.
2
Flag1/Flag2 (Signal flags)
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM
signals that cue this unit to automatically switch
decoders.
Press n on the remote control repeatedly to
select Language and then press h.
System Memory
Signal Info.
Language
■ Video information
English
Français
HDMI Signal (HDMI signal type)
Type of the source video signals and the video signals
output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.
3
HDMI Resolution (HDMI resolution)
Resolution of the source video signals and the video
signals output at the HDMI IN jacks of this unit.
Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
to select the language of your choice.
4
Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
Analog Resolution (Analog resolution)
Resolution of the source video signals and the analog
video signals output at the COMPONENT
MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.
HDMI Error (HDMI Error)
Error message for HDMI sources or connected
HDMI devices. See page 144 for details.
117 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 120).
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
■ Controlling this unit
■ Controlling a TV
Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this
unit (see page 8).
Set the operation mode selector to TV to control your TV.
To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote
control code for DTV or PHONO (see page 120). When
you set the remote control codes for both DTV and
PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV.
POWER
POWER
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
DTV
VCR 1
*1
POWER
STANDBY
AV
TV
SLEEP
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
*1
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
AV
TV
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
SLEEP
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
DTV
VCR 1
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
SELECT
SELECT
AMP
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
SOURCE
SOURCE
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
MENU
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
*1
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
EFFECT
MEMORY
–
MUTE
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
TV
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
AUDIO
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
*1
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
MEMORY
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
2
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
NET RADIO
USB
NIGHT
ENHANCER
+ 10
ENT
MODE
*2
1 MEMORY
PTY SEEK START
ON
0
EON
NET RADIO
USB
NIGHT
ENHANCER
+ 10
ENT
MODE
PTY SEEK START
*2
PC/MCX
PC/MCX
OFF
2
9
FREQ/TEXT
MOVIE
REC
REC
MACRO LEARN
CLEAR
OFF
RENAME
(U.S.A. model)
Notes
These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
*2 These buttons control this unit only when the component
operation mode selector is set to AMP.
ON
MACRO LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
(U.S.A. model)
Notes
*1
These buttons always control your TV regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
Remote control
*2
118 En
–
TV INPUT
CLASSICAL
1 MEMORY
*1
–
TV MUTE
AUDIO
ENTER
RETURN
*1
TV
SET MENU
TITLE
BAND
*2
Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER
Turns on or off the power.
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV MUTE
Mutes the audio output.
TV INPUT
Changes the input source.
These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode
selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column on
page 119.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Controlling other components
TV MUTE
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE to control
other components selected with the input selector buttons.
You must set the appropriate remote control code for each
input source in advance (see page 120). The following
table shows the function of each control button used to
control other components assigned to each input selector
button. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly
operate the selected component.
1
3
4
TV
AV
STANDBY
POWER
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
DTV
VCR 1
SLEEP
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
3
4
5
6
LEVEL
SELECT
2
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
7
LEVEL
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
MUTE
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
8
9
AUDIO
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
DISPLAY
RETURN
EFFECT
MEMORY
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
1 MEMORY
MOVIE
6
7
8
2
NIGHT
ENHANCER
0
+ 10
ENT
FREQ/TEXT
EON
NET RADIO
USB
MODE
0
A
PTY SEEK START
REC
PC/MCX
SOURCE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
PRESET/CH
TITLE
BAND
9
The remote control has 14 modes (input areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 14
different components.
2
POWER
PHONO
y
1
POWER
OFF
ON
MACRO LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
TV
MUTE
SET MENU
TITLE
MENU
BAND
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
(U.S.A. model)
ENTER
AUDIO
DVD player/
VCR
DVD
recorder
Cable TV/
Satellite
tuner
TV
LD player
CD player
MD
recorder/
CD
recorder
AV
POWER
Power *1
Power *1
VCR power
Power *1
Power *1
Power *1
CH +
TV
Channel up
channel up*3
Channel up
Channel up
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
TV
channel up*3 channel up*3 channel up*3 channel up*3 channel up*3 channel up*3 channel up*3
CH –
TV channel
down*3
Channel
down
Channel
down
Channel
down
TV channel
down*3
TITLE
Title
Title
Title
Title
ENTER
PRESET/CH k
Power *1
*2
TV channel
down*3
TV channel
down*3
Tape deck
Tuner
Power *1
Power *1
TV channel
down*3
TV channel
down*3
iPod
TV channel
down*3
PC/MCX2000/
Internet
Radio/USB
TV channel
down*3
Bookmark*7
Band
Subsequent
menu
Menu enter
Menu select
Menu select
Menu up
Menu up
Menu up
Preset up
(1 to 8)
Up
Up
Down
Down
Menu down
Menu down
A-E/CAT. l
Menu left
Menu left
Menu left
Preset down
(A to E)
Previous
menu*6
Previous
menu
A-E/CAT. h
Menu right
Menu right
Menu right
Preset up
(A to E)
Subsequent
menu*6
Subsequent
menu
PRESET/CH n
5
RETURN, Return
MEMORY
Return
Return
Return
6
1-9, 0, +10 Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
7
ll
Search
backward
Search
backward
VCR search
backward *2
hh
Search
forward
Search
forward
VCR search
forward *2
8
9
0
A
Direction
A/B
Memory
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons*9
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
VCR search Search
backward *2 backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward*4
Select NET
RADIO
VCR search
forward *2
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward*4
Select USB
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Direction
back
Skip
backward
Skip
backward*8
Skip forward
Skip
forward*8
b
Skip
backward
Chapter/
Skip
backward
a
Skip forward
Chapter/
Direction
Skip forward Skip forward
Skip forward
forward
REC/
DISC
SKIP
Disc skip
(player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec
VCR rec *2
s
Stop
Stop
VCR stop *2 VCR stop *2 Stop
VCR pause
*2
*2
VCR rec *2
e
Pause
Pause
VCR pause
p
Play
Play
VCR play *2 VCR play *2 Play
MENU
Menu
AUDIO
Audio
DISPLAY
Display
ENT
Menu
Menu
Display
Display
Enter/recall
Enter
Pause
Select PC/
MCX
Disc skip
Rec
Rec
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Stop
Pause
Pause
Pause
Pause
(Play/
Pause)*5
Play
Play
Play
Play
(Play/
Pause)*5
Play
Previous
menu
Previous
menu
Display
Display
Audio
Enter
Display
Display
Display
Note
See page 120 for details about the items marked with asterisk (*).
119 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Menu down
Preset down
(1 to 8)
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Notes
*1
This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
These buttons operate your VCR only when you set the appropriate remote control code for VCR 1 (see page 120).
*3 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the operation mode selector position.
*4 Press and hold to search backward or forward.
*5 Simple remote mode (see page 75).
*6 Menu browse mode only (see page 75).
*7 Press and hold to store your favorite Internet Radio stations with bookmarks (see page 80).
*8 These buttons are not operational when the Internet Radio is selected as the sub input source of NET/USB.
*9 Press 1-8 to assign or recall the preset items (see page 81).
*2
■ Selecting a component to be controlled
You can select a component to be controlled
independently of the input source selected with the input
selector buttons.
Press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the
desired component.
The name of the component to be controlled appears in the
display window on the remote control.
Setting remote control codes
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area. For a complete list of available remote
control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL
CODES” at the end of this manual.
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each input area.
SELECT
Remote control code default settings
■ Controlling optional components
(Option mode)
“OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be
programmed with remote control functions independently
from any input source. This area is useful for
programming commands that are to be used only as a part
of a macro function or for components that do not have a
valid remote control code.
To select the option mode, press SELECT n
repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display
window on the remote control.
Input area
Library
(component
category)
Manufacturer
Default
code
XM
TUNER
YAMAHA
2604
NET/USB
TUNER
YAMAHA
2607
PHONO
TV
–
–
TUNER
TUNER
YAMAHA
2602
CD
CD
YAMAHA
2300
MULTI CH
INPUT
DVD
YAMAHA
2100
V-AUX/
DOCK
TUNER
YAMAHA
2606
CBL/SAT
CABLE
–
–
MD/TAPE
MD
YAMAHA
2500
CD-R
CD-R
YAMAHA
2400
DTV
TV
–
–
SELECT
Note
You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See
page 122 to program buttons operated within this component
control area.
VCR 1
VCR
–
–
DVR/VCR2
DVR
YAMAHA
2807
DVD
DVD
YAMAHA
2100
Note
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above.
In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.
120 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
1
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press an input selector button to
select the input area you want to set up.
4
NET/USB
AMP
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
Press the numeric buttons to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the
component you want to use.
For a complete list of available remote control codes,
refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
SOURCE
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
TV
DTV
VCR 1
DVR/VCR 2
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
9
0
DVD
5
2
CLASSICAL
Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the name of the
selected input area (ex. DVD) appear alternately in
the display window on the remote control.
MOVIE
Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window on the remote
control if setting was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window on the remote
control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case,
start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another
component, press the input selector button, or
SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then
repeat steps 2 through 5.
LEARN
Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
y
• You can set a remote control code of a different type of
component to an input area. Press l / h repeatedly to
change the library (component category).
Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR,
L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),
L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable),
L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR
• If you want to setup for another input area, press the input
selector button, or press SELECT k / n repeatedly to
select the input area.
Notes
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.
3
Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected component
appears in the display window.
Note
0000 appears in the display window if no code has been set.
LEARN
7
Press p or AV POWER to confirm whether
you can control your component using the
remote control.
POWER
or
AV
y
If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your
component has more than one code, try each of them until
you find the correct one.
Notes
• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control
if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or
when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes
for commercially available audio and video components
(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote
control function using the learn feature (see “Programming
codes from other remote controls”) or use the remote control
supplied with the component.
• Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over
remote control code functions.
121 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
6
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Programming codes from other
remote controls
2
Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control
on a flat surface so that their infrared
transmitters are aimed at each other.
TV
AV
POWER
POWER
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD
STANDBY
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
TUNER
POWER
PHONO
DVD
CD-R
Other remote control
PURE DIRECT
MENU
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
AUDIO
ENTER
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
(U.S.A. model)
SRCH MODE
BAND
POWER
MD/TAPE
STANDBY
DVR/VCR 2
AV
VCR 1
POWER
TV
DTV
SET MENU
TITLE
POWER
SELECT
LEVEL
PRESET/CH
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
You can program remote control codes from other remote
controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program
functions not included in the basic operations covered by
the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control
code is not available. You can program the function of
other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas
in the following illustration. The buttons can be
programmed independently for each input area.
SLEEP
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
PHONO
TUNER
CD
DISPLAY
RETURN
MULTI CH IN
EFFECT
MEMORY
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
DTV
VCR 1
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
2
NIGHT
ENHANCER
0
+ 10
ENT
1 MEMORY
9
SELECT
FREQ/TEXT
EON
NET RADIO
USB
MODE
MOVIE
3
Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the name of the selected input area
(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window
on the remote control.
PTY SEEK START
REC
AMP
+
+
+
TV VOL
CH
VOLUME
–
–
–
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
PC/MCX
SOURCE
OFF
ON
MACRO LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
TV
(U.S.A. model)
LEARN
Note
The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most
of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some
special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the
operating instructions for the other remote control.
1
Notes
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control
code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 3.
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press an input selector button to
select an input area.
NET/USB
AMP
4
PHONO
TUNER
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
SOURCE
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
TV
DTV
VCR 1
TV
AV
POWER
TUNER
SLEEP
POWER
MULTI CH IN
STANDBY
CD
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
POWER
PHONO
DVD
CD-R
AMP
SELECT
TV
SOURCE
MD/TAPE
+
DVR/VCR 2
–
VOLUME
VCR 1
+
DTV
–
CH
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
+
PURE DIRECT
–
MUTE
SET MENU
AUDIO
A/B/C/D/E
STRAIGHT
TV VOL
TV INPUT
MENU
PRESET/CH
SRCH MODE
LEVEL
TITLE
TV MUTE
BAND
ENTER
4
122 En
EFFECT
Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to SOURCE.
When you set the operation mode selector to AMP and program a
remote control codes from other remote controls, the
programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this
unit.
DISPLAY
Note
RETURN
(U.S.A. model)
MEMORY
8
MOVIE
EXTD SUR.
3
SELECT
ENTERTAIN
ENT
ENHANCER
2
7
LIVE/CLUB
SUR. DECODE
+ 10
NIGHT
1
STEREO
2
6
CLASSICAL
0
RENAME
1 MEMORY
USB
CLEAR
5
9
MACRO LEARN
NET RADIO
ON
REC
PC/MCX
OFF
(U.S.A. model)
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
5
Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
“NG” appears in the display window on the remote
control if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start
over from step 4.
TV
POWER
PHONO
DTV
You can change the name of the input source that appears
in the display window on the remote control if you want to
use a different name than the factory preset. This feature is
useful when you have set an input area to control a
different component.
AV
1
POWER
TUNER
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD
DVD
CD-R
POWER
MD/TAPE
STANDBY
DVR/VCR 2
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
VCR 1
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
SELECT
(U.S.A. model)
Changing source names in the
display window
Other remote control
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press an input selector
button to select the input area you want to
rename.
The name of the selected input area appears in the
display window.
AMP
NET/USB
SOURCE
TV
y
• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4
and 5.
• If you continuously want to program another function for
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the
component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.
6
PHONO
or
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
AMP
DTV
VCR 1
SOURCE
TV
(U.S.A. model)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Press LEARN again to exit the learning
mode.
LEARN
Notes
• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control
if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or
when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.
However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– when the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each
other at the appropriate angle.
– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– when the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
2
Press RENAME using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
RENAME
Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, start over from 2.
123 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
3
Press k / n to select and enter a character.
Pressing n changes the character as follows:
A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),
/ (slash), and space.
Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
Macro programming features
The macro programming feature makes it possible to
perform a series of operations with the press of a single
button. For example, when you want to play a CD,
normally you would turn on the components, select the
CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The
macro programming feature lets you perform all of these
operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The
buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with
macro programs. You can also program your own macros
(see page 126).
■ MACRO operations
4
Press h to move the cursor to the next
position.
Macro buttons
(U.S.A. model)
1 MEMORY
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
PRESET/CH
STANDBY
POWER
2
9
0
FREQ/TEXT
EON
NET RADIO
USB
NIGHT
ENHANCER
+ 10
ENT
MODE
PTY SEEK START
REC
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
SLEEP
PC/MCX
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
DTV
ENTER
VCR 1
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
OFF
ON
MACRO LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
A/B/C/D/E
MACRO
MACRO ON/OFF
y
Press l to move the cursor to the previous position.
1
Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON.
OFF
5
Press ENTER to set the new name.
“OK” appears in the display window on the remote
control if renaming was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window on the remote
control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case,
start over from step 3.
ON
MACRO LEARN
CLEAR
2
Press the desired macro button.
3
Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF
when you finish to using the macro
programming operation.
y
If you continuously want to rename another input area, press
the input selector button, or press SELECT k / n repeatedly
to select the component, then repeat steps 3 through 5.
6
Press RENAME again to exit the renaming
mode.
OFF
ON
MACRO LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
Note
Notes
“ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if
you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when
you press more than one button simultaneously.
• While the remote control is running a macro program, it does
not accept any other operation until it has completed running
the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing).
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation is complete.
y
This feature is useful when you change the input or output
assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.
Refer to “Rename” on page 95.
124 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Default macro functions
Pressing
macro button
To automatically transmit these signals in order
First
Second
Third
STANDBY
STANDBY
POWER
POWER
—
—
(*1)
(*2)
POWER
TV
XM
POWER
XM
NET/USB
POWER
NET/USB
PHONO
PHONO
TUNER
TUNER
CD
CD
MULTI CH IN
MULTI CH IN
V-AUX/DOCK
V-AUX/DOCK
CBL/SAT
—
—
—
(*3)
CBL/SAT
POWER
MD/TAPE
(*1)
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
DTV
VCR 1
VCR 1
DVR/VCR 2
—
(CD area) (*4)
—
—
—
(MD/TAPE area) (*4)
(CD-R area) (*4)
—
(VCR 1 area) (*4)
DVR/VCR 2
(DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4)
DVD
DVD
(DVD area) (*4)
*1
You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC
OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.
*2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 120), you can turn on the power of your TV
without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.
*3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.
*4 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD
recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the input area of that
component (see page 122) or set a remote control code (see page 120).
125 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
CD-R
—
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Programming macro operations
You can program your own macro and use the macro
programming feature to transmit several remote control
commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to
set up remote control codes or perform learning operations
before programming the macro.
Note
“AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a
button other than a macro button.
3
Notes
• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again
when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.
• We do not recommend programming continuous operations
such as volume control in a macro.
1
Press the buttons for the functions you want
to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you
have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote
control automatically exits the macro mode. The
following example is for programming the following
procedure:
Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press DVD.
Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press AV POWER.
Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press SLEEP.
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press MACRO using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
POWER
POWER
TV
AV
STANDBY
2
NET/USB AUDIO SEL
AMP
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
MCR 2: AV POWER
POWER
MCR 3: SLEEP
SLEEP
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
3
SOURCE
DTV
VCR 1
TV
1
or
MCR 1: DVD
(U.S.A. model)
MACRO
AMP
SOURCE
Indicates the
number of macro
steps entered
TV
Note
Flashes alternately so you can
set the next step
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
2
Press the macro button you want to use to
operate the macro.
The macro button name (ex. “M;DVD”) and the
selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear
alternately in the display window on the remote
control.
STANDBY
POWER
NET/USB
PHONO
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
DTV
VCR 1
To change the selected input area, press SELECT k / n.
Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,
whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected input area.
4
Press MACRO again using a ballpoint pen or
similar object when the operation sequence
you want to program is complete.
Note
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
(U.S.A. model)
126 En
Note
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more
than one button simultaneously.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Clearing configurations
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names
and setup remote control ID.
3
Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing
was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display
window on the remote control.
■ Clearing function sets
CLEAR
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press CLEAR by using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“CLEAR” appears in the display window.
AMP
y
Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the
button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer
setting, if you have set remote control codes).
SOURCE
TV
CLEAR
or
Notes
• “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to
complete.
• “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press
more than one button simultaneously.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, start over from step 1.
2
Press k / n to select the clear mode.
L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area)
Clears all learned functions in the respective
input area. The name of a component is shown
after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector
button to select the input area.
L;AMP
Clears all learned functions for controlling the
amplifier functions of this unit.
L;ALL
Clears all learned functions.
M;ALL
Clears all programmed macros.
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY
Clears all remote functions and returns the
remote to the factory settings.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
127 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned for a certain button in
each control area.
1
3
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press an input selector
button to select the input area containing the
function you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object and then press the button
you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing
was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the display
window on the remote control, release the ballpoint
pen or similar object used to press CLEAR to exit the
clearing mode. The remote control returns to the
learning mode.
AMP
NET/USB
SOURCE
MODE
TV
PHONO
or
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
LEARN
DTV
AMP
VCR 1
PTY SEEK START
CLEAR
RENAME
(U.S.A. model)
SOURCE
2
Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name
(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display
window.
LEARN
Notes
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote
control code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.
128 En
y
(U.S.A. model)
TV
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 4.
• If you continuously want to clear another function for
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the
input area, then repeat step 4.
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have
set remote control codes).
4
Press LEARN again to exit.
Notes
• “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if
clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Clearing a macro function
You can clear the function programmed for a certain
macro button.
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press MACRO using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACRO
or
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Note
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
2
Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the macro
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote
control if clearing was successful.
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
DTV
OFF
ON
VCR 1
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
MACRO LEARN
CLEAR
RENAME
(U.S.A. model)
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 2.
• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts
to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you
have set remote control codes).
3
Press MACRO again to exit the macro
programming mode.
Notes
• “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if
clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control
if you press more than one button simultaneously.
129 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio/video system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to
set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You
can control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.
Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third
room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.
Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.
• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second
and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).
• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.
• A video monitor for the second room
y
• You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit.
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.
REMOTE
REMOTE
IN
Infrared signal
receiver
OUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
OUT
YAMAHA
component
YAMAHA
component
This unit
REMOTE
IN
■ Using external amplifiers
To use an external amplifier in Zone 2 or Zone 3, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT terminals and select
“EXT” in “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” (see page 113).
ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT
ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT
ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT
SP OUT
Amplifier
Amplifier
MONITOR OUT
DVD player
(or other component)
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
This unit
MAIN
SYSTEM
Remote control
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Infrared signal
receiver
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
Infrared emitter
Main room
(Main zone)
REMOTE OUT
Second room
(Zone 2)
Third room
(Zone 3)
REMOTE IN
REMOTE IN
Notes
• Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room when “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” are set to
“Fixed” (see page 113).
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
130 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
The SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or
more than one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.
If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals and select either “INT:[SP1]” or
“INT:[SP2]” for “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” (see page 113).
If you want to use two internal amplifiers (both SP1 and SP2) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals and select “Both” for “Zone2
Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” (see page 113).
R
+
SP1
– PRESENCE –
+
L
R
SP2
L
+
R
+
SURROUND BACK/
– BI-AMP –
+
L
SINGLE
–
Second room
(Zone 2)
Third room
(Zone 3)
Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3
You can select the zone you want to control by using the
control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.
2
Press ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel
repeatedly to select the zone you want to
control.
ZONE CONTROLS
■ Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3
Front panel operations
1
Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on
the front panel to individually turn on or off
Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Each time you press ZONE CONTROLS, the front
panel display changes as shown below, and the
indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for
approximately 5 seconds. However, no indicator
flashes when the main zone is selected.
ZONE2
ZONE3
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
y
Once MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed
inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER and
STANDBY on the remote control to turn on the main zone,
Zone 2 and Zone 3.
No indicator flashes when the main zone is
selected.
ZONE2
Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions.
ZONE3
Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions.
131 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
y
• You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the
selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,
the currently selected zone mode is automatically
canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROLS again.
• The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3
are turned on.
3
Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone
2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of
Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of
the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or
“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3” on page 133 to perform further
operations.
Remote control operations
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SELECT k repeatedly to select the
zone you want to control.
“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display
window on the remote control.
■ Turning on or off Zone 2 and/or Zone 3
using the remote control
POWER and STANDBY on the remote control work
differently depending on the selected zone that appears in
the display window on the remote control.
• When the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is
selected (see page 132), you can turn on the main zone,
Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode
individually.
• When the all mode is selected, pressing POWER turns
on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously
and pressing STANDBY sets them to the standby mode
simultaneously.
Control mode
Display window
Name of the selected
input area
Turns on the main
zone only or sets it to
the standby mode.
Zone 2 mode
“ZONE 2” or “2;name
of the selected input
area”
Turns on Zone 2 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
Zone 3 mode
“ZONE 3” or “3;name
of the selected input
area”
Turns on Zone 3 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
“ALL”
POWER: turns on
the main zone, Zone
2 and Zone 3.
STANDBY: sets the
main zone, Zone 2
and Zone 3 to the
standby mode.
Main zone
mode
AMP
SOURCE
SELECT
TV
POWER
and
STANDBY
All mode
Notes
or
2
3
Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone
2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of
Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of
the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or
“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3” on page 133 to perform further
operations.
Press SELECT k / n to exit from the
Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.
132 En
• When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN”
appears for a few seconds when POWER or STANDBY is
pressed.
• “ALL” appears in the display window on the remote control
only when SELECT n is pressed.
■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or
set the operation mode selector to AMP and then
press one of the input selector buttons on the
remote control) to select the input source of the
selected zone.
If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2:
name of the selected input area” or “3: name of the
selected input area” is displayed in the display window on
the remote control when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected
respectively.
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
Note
INPUT
When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3,
VOLUME +/– can be used only when “Zone2 Volume” or
“Zone3 Volume” is set to “Variable” in “Zone2 Set” or “Zone3
Set” (see page 113).
■ Adjusting the balance of the speaker
level in Zone 2 or Zone 3
or
NET/USB
AMP
PHONO
SOURCE
TUNER
V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT
TV
DTV
VCR 1
CD
MULTI CH IN
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVR/VCR 2
DVD
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
“BALANCE” and then rotate PROGRAM on the
front panel to adjust the balance of the front left
and right speaker level of the selected zone.
(U.S.A. model)
• Select TUNER as the input source to use the TUNER
features in the selected zone. For details about the
TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on
page 56.
• Select XM as the input source to use the XM Satellite
Radio features in the selected zone. For details about
the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM
SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 63.
Note
The selected input source is shared across all zones.
• You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected
zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently
selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press
ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel again.
• When a video monitor is connected to one of the ZONE VIDEO
jacks, you can display the control information of Zone 2 or
Zone 3 and XM Satellite Radio information on the video
monitor screen. Set “Zone OSD” to “Zone2&Zone3” or
“Zone2” (see page 112).
PROGRAM
■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then
press CH +/– on the remote control to adjust the
high-frequency response (TREBLE) or
TV VOL +/– to adjust the low-frequency response
(BASS) respectively.
+
TV VOL
–
AMP
SOURCE
BASS
TV
■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
+
CH
–
Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the
volume level of the selected zone.
VOLUME
+
or
VOLUME
TREBLE
y
You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using
TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting
the tonal quality” on page 52.
Note
–
Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display
window of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality
of the corresponding zone (see page 132).
y
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to
the selected zone.
133 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
y
TONE
CONTROL
ADVANCED SETUP
ADVANCED SETUP
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
Notes
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see
page 34).
• Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
Using ADVANCED SETUP
3
(U.S.A. model)
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
TONE
CONTROL
AUDIO
SELECT
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select the parameter you want to
adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
See page 135 for a complete list of available
parameters.
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
PHONES
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
1-2,5
1
3
PROGRAM
2,4
Currently selected
parameter
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
Currently selected
parameter setting
SPEAKER IMP.
8 MIN
MASTER
2
4
Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel
and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to
the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel
repeatedly to change the selected parameter
setting.
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
While holding
down
5
MASTER
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and turn off this unit.
MASTER
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on
this unit.
134 En
ADVANCED SETUP
■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN
• Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .
• Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .
SPEAKER
IMP.
Speaker
Front
8ΩMIN
Impedance level
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Surround back
Front
6ΩMIN
WAKE ON RS232C
Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode.
Choices: YES, NO
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES
[Other models]: NO
• Select “YES” to set this unit to transmit data via the
RS-232C interface.
• Select “NO” to set this unit not to transmit data via the
RS-232C interface.
■ Remote control AMP ID
Center
Surround
■ Wake on RS-232C access
The impedance of each
speaker must be 4 Ω or
higher.
RC AMP ID
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote
control recognition (see page 121).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “2001”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “2002”.
Center
Surround
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Surround back
USER PRESET
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings (see page 149).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
Notes
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit.
However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be
initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor on the
front panel of this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” if you want to activate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor.
• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor.
Note
We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases.
You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library
code for the remote control (see page 121).
■ Remote control TUNER ID
RC TUNER ID
Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for
remote control recognition (see page 138).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “2602”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “2603”.
Note
You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library
code for the remote control (see page 138).
■ Remote control XM ID RC XM ID
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote
control recognition (see page 138).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library
code is set to “2604”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library
code is set to “2605”.
Note
You need to set the corresponding remote control XM library
code for the remote control (see page 138).
135 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ User presets
Note
ADVANCED SETUP
■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP
(Asia and General models only)
Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according
to the frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South
America.
• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.
■ Bi-AMP BI-AMP
Use to activate or deactivate the bi-AMP function.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-AMP
function.
• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-AMP
function.
Note
When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SURROUND BACK
terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in
that the SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the
bi-AMP connection (see page 19).
■ Video reset
VIDEO RESET
Use to initialize the parameter settings for “Video” in
“Manual Setup” (see page 101).
Choices: YES, CANCEL
Note
The parameter setting for “Short Message” or “On Screen” is not
initialized (see page 101).
■ Network reset
NETWORK RESET
Use this feature to reset the network settings of this unit
(see page 109) to the initial factory settings.
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any network settings of
this unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the network settings of this
unit.
Notes
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
• When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “NET/USB” is
automatically set to “On” (see page 109) and the registered
client ID of this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000 is cleared
(see page 80).
136 En
■ TV format
TV FORMAT
Use this feature to set the color encoding format of your
television.
Choices: NTSC, PAL
Initial setting:
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models]: NTSC
[Other models]: PAL
Note
This parameter setting only affects the video monitor connected
to the MONITOR OUT jacks and does not affect the Zone 2
video monitor connected to the ZONE 2 VIDEO jacks.
■ Monitor check for HDMI up-scaling
MONITOR CHECK
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check
function of this unit. When this parameter is set to “YES”,
this unit receives the information of the available video
signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via
HDMI (see page 102).
Choices: YES, SKIP
■ GUI language
GUI LANGUAGE
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that
appears in the GUI (graphical user interface) menu of this
unit.
Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese),
FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German), SPANISH
(Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian)
ADVANCED SETUP
Setting remote control ID
4
When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
Press the numeric buttons to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the input
area you want to use.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
9
0
MOVIE
■ Setting remote control AMP ID
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE.
AMP
SOURCE
AMP
or
TV
2
SOURCE
Remote control AMP codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
AMP code for the input area you want to use.
TV
AMP library
code
Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object and
then press l / h repeatedly until “L;AMP”
appears in the display window on the remote
control.
(remote control
setting)
Function
Remote
control AMP
ID
2001
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2002
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
PRESET/CH
Note
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
5
Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window if the setting
was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1.
PRESET/CH
Notes
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
3
Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected input area
appears in the display window on the remote control.
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
6
Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
LEARN
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
137 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID
(see page 135).
LEARN
ADVANCED SETUP
■ Setting remote control tuner ID or XM ID
4
1
Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press TUNER or XM on
the remote control to select the tuner or XM
to change the remote control ID.
Press the numeric buttons to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the input
area you want to use.
AMP
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
1
2
3
4
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
5
6
7
8
9
0
MOVIE
TUNER
SOURCE
TV
or
or
Remote control tuner codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
tuner code for the input area you want to use.
AMP
XM
SOURCE
TV
2
Tuner library
code
Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object and
then press l / h repeatedly until “L;TUN”
and “TUNER”, or “L;TUN” and “XM”
alternately appear in the display window on
the remote control.
PRESET/CH
(remote control
setting)
To operate this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2603
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
Remote control XM codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
XM code for the input area you want to use.
XM library
code
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
(remote control
setting)
Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected input area
appears in the display window on the remote control.
Function
Remote
control XM
ID
2604
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2605
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
3
Remote
control
tuner ID
2602
(initial setting)
LEARN
Notes
Function
Note
You need to set the corresponding remote control tuner ID
or XM ID (see page 135).
5
PRESET/CH
Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window if the setting
was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1.
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
6
Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
LEARN
138 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
Problem
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
No sound.
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
33
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
16
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
—
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
23-29
The optimizer microphone is connected.
Disconnect the optimizer microphone.
38
Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,
“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
42
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG” while playing a source
encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or
“COAX/OPT”.
42
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons on the remote control).
Speaker connections are not secure.
Secure the connections.
16
The volume is turned down.
Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted.
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output and then adjust the volume.
43
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
21
“Support Audio” is set to “Other” and
“HDMI” audio signals are not being
played back on this unit.
Set “Support Audio” to “RX-V2700” in “Option”.
115
40, 43
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
139 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
No picture.
Cause
The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Remedy
See
page
Set “Conversion” to “On” or connect your source
components in the same way as you connect your
video monitor to this unit.
102
“Short Message” is set to “OFF”.
Set “Short Message” to “On”.
103
“Wall Paper” is set to “None”.
Set “Wall Paper” to “Yes” or “Gray”.
104
“Conversion” is set to “Off”.
Set “Conversion” to “On”.
102
Non-standard video signals are input.
Short message
displays do not
appear in the video
monitor.
The signals input at the HDMI IN1,
HDMI IN2 or HDMI IN3 jack are being
output at the HDMI OUT jack.
Video signals in the progressive format or
HDTV video signals are being input.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
33, 135
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit.
Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted.
Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output.
43
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
16
Incorrect settings in “Speaker Level”.
Adjust the “Speaker Level” settings.
109
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“Center” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“None”.
Set “Center” to “Small” or “Large”.
105
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
“7ch Stereo”) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
47
No sound is heard
from the presence
speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off.
Press STRAIGHT to turn them on.
51
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
40
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“Surround” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“None”.
Set “Surround” to “Small” or “Large”.
106
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
51
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“Bass Out” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
Set “Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Both”.
107
“Bass Out” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Set “Bass Out” to “Both”.
107
The source does not contain lowfrequency signals.
140 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
Cause
Remedy
See
page
“Surround” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“None” and “Surround Back” is
automatically set to “None”.
Set “Surround” and “Surround Back” to a setting
other than “None”.
106
“Surround Back” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“None”.
Set “Surround Back” to a setting other than “None”.
106
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
42
Incorrect cable connections.
Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cable of your turntable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
26
The volume level is
low while a record is
being played.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
Connect your turntable to this unit through an MChead amplifier.
26
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
A humming sound is
heard.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
24, 26
Some components cannot record Dolby
Digital or DTS sources.
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
26
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“Memory Guard” in “Option” is set to
“On”.
Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.
114
141 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See
page
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited.
Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
16
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
■ Tuner
Problem
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
FM
AM
Cause
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Remedy
See
page
Check the antenna connections.
31
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
58
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak.
Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
58
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
58
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises can result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
142 En
59, 60
TROUBLESHOOTING
■
XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
Status message
Cause
Remedy
See
page
CHECK ANTENNA
The XM Passport and XM Passport Home
Dock are not connected to the XM jack of
this unit or do not work properly.
Check XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock
connections and orient for the best reception level.
63
UPDATING
The XM user encryption code is being
updated.
Wait until the encryption code is updated.
—
NO SIGNAL
The signal is too weak.
Adjust the orientation of the XM Passport System for
the best reception level.
63
LOADING
It takes longer than four seconds for audio
or text data to be decoded.
Wait until the decoding process has finished.
—
OFF AIR
The XM Satellite Radio channel you
selected is not currently broadcasting any
signals.
Check the channel number again or select another
XM Satellite Radio channel.
—
<XM> - - -
The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer
available.
--- / ---
No artist name or song title is available.
<CAT> - - -
No channels are available for the selected
category.
Select another channel category by pressing
CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on
the remote control) repeatedly.
69
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel.
11
■ Remote control
Problem
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle.
Reposition this unit.
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries.
The batteries do not last long and get
quickly exhausted.
Using alkaline batteries is strongly recommended.
The operation mode selector is set
incorrectly.
Set the operation mode selector correctly.
When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.
When operating the component selected by the input
selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.
When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO
area, set it to the TV position.
—
Set the remote control code correctly using
“LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end
of this manual.
120
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
120
The remote control code was not correctly
set.
The library code of the remote control and
the remote control ID of this unit do not
match.
—
Match the remote control ID of this unit with the
corresponding remote control library code.
11
—
121, 135
143 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
The remote control
does not learn new
functions.
The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
Memory capacity is full.
Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.
127
Remedy
See
page
122
11
122
—
■ HDMI
Error message
Cause
Device Over
The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI
components.
—
HDCP Error
HDCP authentication failed.
Check that the connected HDMI components support
the HDCP copy protection standards.
—
■ Network and USB
Problem
The PC server/MCX-2000/
Internet Radio does not
function properly.
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The IP address is not set properly.
Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.
Alternately, perform manual configuration
according to the current operating environment.
109
The network cable is not connected.
Connect it properly.
30
The PC does not have Windows Media
Connect 2.0 installed in it.
Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 in the PC.
—
The music is recorded in a format that
cannot be played on this unit. This unit
cannot play music formats other than
WMA, MP3 and WAV (PCM format).
Also note that it cannot play certain
music files even if these are recorded in
the WMA, MP3 or WAV format.
Play music recorded in a format that this unit is
compatible with.
—
The music is copyright-protected.
This unit cannot play copyright-protected music.
—
Windows Media Connect
2.0 cannot be connected.
The Windows XP PC is logging on to a
domain.
Log on to the local machine instead of the
domain.
—
The MusicCAST server
cannot be connected.
You are attempting to connect to
MCX-1000. The MusicCAST server that
can be connected by this unit is
MCX-2000.
Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.
—
Auto Configuration is not executed.
Execute “Auto Configure”.
79
The music in the PC
server cannot be played
back.
144 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem
Cause
Remedy
See
page
“Disconnected” is
displayed even when a
USB device is present.
This unit recognized the USB device as
an illegal device.
Turn this unit off then on again.
81
The Internet Radio cannot
be played.
The firewall of the network device is
activated. The Internet Radio can be
played only when it passes through the
port designated by each radio station.
The port number is variable depending
on radio station.
Check the firewall setting of the network device.
—
Connection to the Internet is
disconnected.
Check the configuration of the network device,
and then contact the network connection provider.
—
The music files and
directories in the USB
device cannot be viewed.
The music files and directories are placed
in locations other than the FAT area.
Place music files and directories in the FAT area.
—
You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory
with more than 500 files.
Modify the data structure on your USB device.
—
The USB device cannot
be recognized.
The connected USB device is other than
a USB mass storage class USB memory
device or USB portable audio player.
This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage
class USB memory device or USB portable audio
player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain
USB devices even when they are devices as
described above.
81
Some devices may become easier to recognize
when they are inserted before turning this unit on.
81
The connected USB device is incorrect.
Connect the USB device that stores the preset
item.
81
The directory that stores the selected item
is changed.
Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8)
again.
81
This unit does not recall
the selected item by using
numeric buttons (1-8).
The USB device is not connected
correctly.
Connect the correct USB device properly.
81
The PC or MCX-2000 that stores the
selected item is turned off.
Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.
79
The selected Internet Radio station is
temporary unavailable or out of service.
Try again when the selected Internet Radio is
providing the service.
80
Preset other Internet Radio stations.
81
Status message
Please wait
Please wait
(Starting Server)
Cause
Remedy
See
page
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your network.
This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
—
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your USB memory
device or USB portable audio player.
This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
—
This unit is in the middle of waking up
MCX-2000 that has been set to the
standby mode.
Wait for approximately 20 seconds.
—
145 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
This unit does not recall
the correct item by using
numeric buttons (1-8).
TROUBLESHOOTING
Status message
Connect error
Disconnected
Access error
Unable to play
Cause
There is a problem with the signal path
from your network to this unit.
Remedy
Check the connection between this unit and the
LAN port on your router or hub.
30
Make sure your router is properly connected and
turned on. Also, make sure your modem is
properly connected and turned on when you are
attempting to listen to Internet Radio.
30
Your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player has been
disconnected from the USB port of this
unit.
Check the connection between this unit and your
USB memory device or USB portable audio
player.
—
The PC server or MCX-2000 previously
connected to this unit no longer exists.
Connect this unit to the available PC server or
MCX-2000.
79
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB
memory device or USB portable audio player to
the USB port of this unit.
34
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
—
This unit cannot access your USB
memory device or USB portable audio
player.
Try another USB memory device or USB portable
audio player.
—
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB
memory device or USB portable audio player to
the USB port of this unit.
34
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
—
Make sure Windows Media Connect 2.0 is
installed on your PC.
—
Check that the songs currently stored on your PC
are playable (MP3, WMA, and WAV).
—
Store some other playable music files (MP3,
WMA, and WAV) on your PC.
—
Try preparing a network exclusively for use with
this unit to separate it from general network
traffic.
—
81
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your PC.
The network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted.
List updated
The list of the contents stored on your PC
server or MCX-2000 has been updated.
Bookmark ON
The desired Internet Radio station has
been added to the “Bookmarks” list.
Bookmark OFF
The stored Internet Radio station has
been removed from the “Bookmarks”
list.
Empty Memory!
No items are assigned to the selected
numeric button.
Assign the desired item to the numeric button.
Not found!
This unit cannot find the assigned item
for the selected numeric button.
Connect the USB device that stores the preset
item.
146 En
See
page
Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.
79
Try again when the selected Internet Radio is
providing the service.
80
Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8)
again.
81
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ iPod
Note
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and on the video monitor, check the connection to
your iPod (see page 29).
Status message
Loading...
Cause
Remedy
See
page
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
29
Try resetting your iPod.
—
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
—
Unknown iPod
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
iPod connected
Your iPod is properly stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as
the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this
unit is complete.
Disconnected
Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
29
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
—
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
—
■ Auto Setup
Error message
Connect MIC!
Cause
Optimizer microphone is not connected.
Remedy
See
page
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
35
Unplug Phones!
Headphones are connected.
Unplug the headphones.
—
No Setup Menu!
All setup menu are set to “Skip”.
Set the desired menu item to “Check”.
36
Memory Guard!
“Memory Guard” is set to “On”.
Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.
114
147 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Before Auto Setup
TROUBLESHOOTING
During Auto Setup
Error message
Cause
Remedy
See
page
E01:No Front SP
Front L/R channel signals are not detected.
Check the front L/R speaker connections.
16
E02:No Sur. SP
A surround channel signal is not detected.
Check the surround speaker connections.
16
E03:No PRNS SP
A presence channel signal is not detected.
Check the presence speaker connections.
16
E04:SBR->SBL
Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.
Connect the surround back speaker to the
LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS
terminal if you only have one surround
back speaker.
16
Background noise is too loud.
Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet
environment.
—
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the
optimizer microphone.
—
E05:Noisy
E06:Check Sur.
Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when you use
surround back speakers.
16
E07:No MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the “Auto Setup” procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
35
The optimizer microphone does not detect
test tones.
Check the microphone setting.
35
Check the speaker connections and
placement.
16
E08:No Signal
E09:User Cancel
The “Auto Setup” procedure was cancelled
due to user activity.
Run “Auto Setup” again.
E10:Internal Err.
An internal error occurred.
Run “Auto Setup” again.
35
35
After Auto Setup
Warning message
W1:Out of Phase
Cause
Remedy
Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections for proper
polarity (+ or –).
W2:Over Distance
The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker closer to the listening
position.
—
W3:Level Error
The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive.
Readjust the speaker installation so that all
speakers are set in locations with similar
conditions.
—
W4:SP Mismatch
The result of the wiring check of “Auto
Setup” is different from “Speaker Set” in
“Manual Setup”.
16
Use speakers of similar quality.
—
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.
35
Use “Speaker Set” in “Manual Setup” to
adjust the speaker settings manually.
105
If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “Auto Setup” again.
If warning “W1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
If warning “W2” or “W3” appears, no corrections are made.
If error “E10” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.
148 En
16
Check the speaker connections.
Notes
•
•
•
•
See
page
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
Notes
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it
outward to the OFF position.
(U.S.A. model)
3
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select “PRESET”.
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
TONE
CONTROL
AUDIO
SELECT
REC OUT/
ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
FM/AM
MAN'L/AUTO FM
TUNING
MODE
ENHANCER
NIGHT
EDIT
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
STRAIGHT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE CONTROLS
MULTI ZONE
EFFECT
YPAO
ON/OFF
PROGRAM
OPTIMIZER
MIC
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
L
R
AUDIO
OPTICAL
PROGRAM
PHONES
VIDEO AUX
USB
ON
OFF
MASTER
1-2,5
1
3
2,4
USERPRESET
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
CANCEL
4
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel
repeatedly to select “RESET”.
MASTER
STRAIGHT
2
Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel
and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to
the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
EFFECT
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
USERPRESET
While holding
down
RESET
MASTER
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.
5
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to
confirm your selection and turn off this unit.
MASTER
149 En
GLOSSARY
GLOSSARY
■ Bi-amplification connection
■ Dolby Digital
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a
speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section
of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the
combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement
each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.
This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much
simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence
the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high
pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes
frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above
the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes
frequencies above its cutoff.
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB
and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ Dialogue normalization
Dialogue Normalization is a feature of Dolby Digital or
DTS, which is used to keep the programs at the same
average listening level so the user does not have to change
the volume control between Dolby Digital or DTS
programs.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”
for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for
2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game
sources.
150 En
GLOSSARY
■ Dolby Surround
■ HDMI
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such
as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video
monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as
multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI
transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure
audio/video interface that meets the security requirements
of content providers and system operators. For further
information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
■ DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio
signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio
CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at
a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while
noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce
distortion, a common occurrence with very high
quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling
rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered
by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.
■ DTS 96/24
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original
96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with fullquality full-motion video for music programs and motion
picture soundtracks on DVD video.
■ MP3
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There
are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources
and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ Neo:6
■ Neural Surround
Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in
surround technology and has been adopted by XM
Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround
recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural
Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency domain
processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound
stage with superior channel separation and localization of
audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to
7.1 multi-channel surround playback.
151 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,
front left and right, center, surround left and right, and
LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels).
This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel
to the existing 5.1-channel format.
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It
employs the irreversible compression method, which
achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data
of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be
capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11
(128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to
music CD.
GLOSSARY
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
■ S-video signal
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the
method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. It does not specify the
compression (coding) method so a desired compression
method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible
with the PCM method (no compression) and some
compression methods including the ADPCM method.
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
152 En
■ WAV
■ WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft
Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression
method, which achieves a high compression rate by
thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human
ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data
quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a
similar audio quality to music CD.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION
■ Elements of a sound field
■ SILENT CINEMA
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that
combine to make up the sound field in addition to the
direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s
instrument.
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberations taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to
enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
■ Sound output from each speaker
Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of
audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the
table below to understand the speaker layout for each
sound field program. For details about the sound output
from each speaker in sound field programs, refer to
“SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD
PROGRAM” in “APPENDIX” at the end of this manual.
Note
Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from
speakers depending on the type of input source being played
back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be
used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of
movies, such as special sound effects, etc.
y
Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you
can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back
speakers (see page 47).
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual
experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your
own home.
153 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any
size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is
exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound
field processor.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION
This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the
Parametric EQ settings (see page 98), to optimize the
frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to
match your listening environment. YPAO uses a
combination of the following three parameters
(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise
adjustment of the frequency characteristics.
■ Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as
the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the
values 0.5 and 10.
■ Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave
increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.
■ Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB
between –20 and +6 dB.
YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your
listening requirements using a combination of the above
three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each
equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit
has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).
This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as
in Figure 1).
Figure 1
Gain
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Band 1
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic
Figure 2
Gain
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Band 1
Frequency
Band 2
154 En
Original frequency
characteristic
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 140 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 170/205/265/345 W
• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)
[Asia, General, China and Korea models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 185 W
• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 200 W
• Dynamic Headroom
8 Ω .................................................................................... 0.84 dB
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................................... 145 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Voltage
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω
PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 2.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct .......... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to OUT (REC)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R
[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .................... 81 dB or more
[Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more
CD, etc.
(5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................450 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................2.0 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) ...........12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Format [MONITOR OUT] (Wall Paper)
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ............ NTSC/PAL
[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models]
................................................................................... PAL/NTSC
• Video Format (Video Conversion)
..........................................................................................NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)
.................................................................................... 60 dB or more
• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Component (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
• Video Format [ZONE OUT] (Gray Back)
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC
[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.2/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)
Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB
• Frequency Response
Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω
155 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................. 125/350/500 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency .............................. 2.5/3.5/8.0 kHz
SPECIFICATIONS
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General and Asia model]
....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA
[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less
[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less
[Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]
6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W
• AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)
[Asia, General and China models] ....... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[Australia and U.K. models] .... 1 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm
(17.1 x 6.7 x 17.3 in)
• Weight .................................................................. 17.2 kg (37.9 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
156 En
SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
L
Front left speaker
SL
Surround left speaker
SBR
Surround back right speaker
C
Center speaker
SR
Surround right speaker
PL
Presence left speaker
R
Front right speaker
SBL
Surround back left speaker
PR
Presence right speaker
Speaker from which no sound is being output
Speaker from which sound is being output
*1
EX
/
PL x
/
: OFF
*2
EX
/
PL x
/
: ON, PRIORITY: PRNS
*3
EX
/
PL x
/
: ON, PRIORITY: SB
Input source
Program
CLASSICAL
Hall in Munich
Hall in Vienna
Hall in
Amsterdam
Church in
Freiburg
Chamber
LIVE/CLUB
Village
Vanguard
Warehouse Loft
Cellar Club
The Roxy
Theatre
The Bottom Line
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
Music Video
Recital/Opera
2-channel audio
(monaural)
PL
L
SL
L
SBL SBR
L
SBL SBR
L
SL
SR
SL
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
L
SR
SL
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
SR
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
SR
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
SR
R
SR
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
R
PR
C
PL
R
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
PL
L
PR
C
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *3
R
PR
C
PL
R
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
PL
L
PR
C
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *2
R
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
PR
C
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *1
R
SR
APPENDIX
PL
(PRO LOGIC)
L
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
PL
SL
MOVIE
STANDARD
SBL SBR
PL
SL
ENTERTAINMENT
Action Game
Roleplaying
Game
PR
C
2-channel audio
(stereo)
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
i
Input source
Program
MOVIE
STANDARD
(PLII Movie)
(PLIIx Movie)
(Neo:6 Cinema)
2-channel audio
(monaural)
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
2-channel audio
(stereo)
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SL
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PRIORITY: PRNS
PL
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *1
PR
C
SBL SBR
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *2
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *3
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
PL
PL
PL
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
PRIORITY: SB
MOVIE
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
Drama
Mono Movie
PL
L
SL
STEREO
2ch Stereo
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
L
SL
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
R
SR
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Monaural playback
STEREO
7ch Stereo
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
L
SL
ii
L
SR
SL
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
L
SR
SL
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
L
SR
SL
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
L
SR
SL
PR
C
PL
R
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
R
SR
PR
C
R
SR
Input source
Program
SURROUND DECODE
PRO LOGIC
2-channel audio
(monaural)
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
2-channel audio
(stereo)
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SL
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PRO LOGIC
PL
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *1
PR
C
SBL SBR
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *2
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *3
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
SURROUND DECODE
PLII Movie
PLII Music
PLII Game
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
Movie/Game
PL
L
SL
PL
R
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Movie/Music/Game
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Music
SURROUND DECODE
PLIIx Movie
PLIIx Music
PLIIx Game
PL
L
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
Movie/Game
PL
L
SL
PL
R
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Movie/Music/Game
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
APPENDIX
SL
PR
C
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Music
iii
Input source
Program
SURROUND DECODE
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
2-channel audio
(monaural)
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SL
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Cinema
PL
2-channel audio
(stereo)
PR
C
SBL SBR
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *1
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Cinema/Music
PR
C
SBL SBR
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *2
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *3
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Music
SURROUND DECODE
neural sur.
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
STRAIGHT
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
Monaural playback
PURE DIRECT
PL
L
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
L
SR
SL
Monaural playback
iv
PL
R
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
PL
R
L
SR
SL
PR
C
SBL SBR
R
SR
GPL/LGPL
■
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print
such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to
print an announcement.)
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections
of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do
not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each
and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and
change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its
users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s
software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free
Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute
copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source
code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in
new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the
Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2)
in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source
code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you
must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this
license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any
third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing
source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone
understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified
by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is
not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the
original authors’ reputations.
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute
corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for
noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b
above.)
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid
the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses,
in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0.
This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed
by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this
General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or
work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any
derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program
or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and
the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that
is true depends on what the Program does.
1.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as
expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long
as such parties remain in full compliance.
5.
You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program
or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or
works based on it.
6.
Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may
not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this
License.
7.
If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2.
You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in
part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be
licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run,
you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most
ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate
copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that
you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
v
APPENDIX
You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately
publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;
keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source
code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,
kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole
purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with
ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and
you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this License.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if
any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;
alter the names:
8.
9.
If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries
either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a
version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a
version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts
of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called
something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu
items–whatever suits your program.
If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For
software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our
free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more
useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you
want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.
■
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of
the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
NO WARRANTY
Preamble
11.
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change
it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to
share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users.
12.
BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS
NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can
redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the
start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each
file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is
found.
<one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place,
Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an
interactive mode:
vi
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated
software packages–typically libraries–of the Free Software Foundation and other
authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully
about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy
to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of
free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can
get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must
provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the
library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them
these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we
offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for
the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the
recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the
original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced
by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We
wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program
by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any
patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full
freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General
Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain
designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We
use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into nonfree programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original
library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the
entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License
permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the
user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free
software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These
disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest
possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this,
non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free
library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General
Public License.
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library
(or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium
does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a
greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission
to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the
whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it
does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom
and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay
close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that
uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter
must be combined with the library in order to run.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary
GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works
made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a
program that is not a library.
4.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0.
This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying
it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also
called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be
conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and
data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been
distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library
or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library
or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used
to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is
not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute
a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing
it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that
uses the Library does.
1.
You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source
code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to
the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2.
You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is
entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires
that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if
the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square
roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of
that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of
who wrote it.
You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under
Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machinereadable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and
2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place
satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5.
A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is
designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a
“work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of
the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable
that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather
than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the
Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even
though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work
can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this
to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and
accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then
the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall
under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code
for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also
fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6.
As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that
uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the
Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the
terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse
engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it
and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of
this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include
the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the
work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the
work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machinereadable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so
that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user
who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not
necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified
definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A
suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library
already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library
functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified
version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version
is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give
the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no
more than the cost of performing this distribution.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
vii
APPENDIX
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be
supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an
argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such
function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its
purpose remains meaningful.
You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License
instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all
the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU
General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version
than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then
you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change
in these notices.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you
have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include
any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However,
as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other
proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable
that you distribute.
7.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option
of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license
version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
14.
NO WARRANTY
15.
BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16.
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side
in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License,
and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of
the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the
Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed
under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a
work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
8.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except
as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9.
You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library
or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work
based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or
works based on it.
10.
11.
Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the
rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties with this License.
If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole
purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this License.
12.
13.
If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either
by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places
the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution
limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be
similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
viii
If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of
software generally.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and
change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively,
under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach
them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of
warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where
the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License
along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if
any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter
the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a
library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That’s all there is to it!
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
CABLE
CD PLAYER
AIWA
0184
ARCAM
0184
AUDIO RESEARCH 0184
AUDIO TON 0184
AUDIOLAB
0184
AUDIOMECA 0184
CAIRN
0184
CD RECORDER
KENWOOD
MARANTZ
PHILIPS
YAMAHA
0653
0653
0653
2400
DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
0757
ALBA
0744
AMSTRAD
0740
APEX DIGITAL
0699, 0744,
0782, 0821, 0823,
0857, 1127
BLAUPINKT 0744
BLUE PARADE
0598
BUSH
0740
CENTREX
0699
CLATRONIC 0815
CYBERHOME 0741
DVD2000
0548
DAEWOO
0811, 0797
DANSAI
0797
DECCA
0797
DENON
0517
DIAMOND
0795
DIGITREX
0699
EMERSON
0618
ENTERPRISE 0618
FISHER
0697
GE
0549, 0744
GO VIDEO
0742
GOLDSTAR 0768
GRADIENTE 0678
GREENHILL 0744
GRUNDIG
0566
HITACHI
0600, 0691
HITEKER
0699
JVC
0585, 0650
KLH
0744
KENWOOD
0517, 0561
KOSS
0678
LG
0768
LIMIT
0795
MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702
MARANTZ
0566
MEMOREX
0858
MICO
0750
MICROSOFT 0549
MINTEK
0744
MITSUBISHI 0548
MUSTEK
0757
NESA
0744
ONKYO
0530
ORITRON
0678
PALSONIC
0699
PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389
PHILIPS
0530, 0566, 0673,
0881
PIONEER
0552, 0598, 0658,
0659
POLK AUDIO 0566
PROSCAN
0549
QWESTAR
0678
RCA
0549, 0598, 0744
ROTEL
0650
SM ELECTRONIC 0757
SAMSUNG
0600
SANYO
0697
SHARP
0657
SHERWOOD 0797
SHINSONIC 0560
SLIM ART
0811
SONY
0560, 0891
SYLVANIA
0702
TATUNG
0797
TEAC
0598, 0744
TECHNICS
0517
THETA DIGITAL
0598
THOMSON
0549
TOSHIBA
0530
URBAN CONCEPTS 0530
XBOX
0549
YAMAHA
0517, 0566, 0572,
2100
ZENITH
0530, 0618, 0768
ZEUS
0811
DVD RECORDER
HITACHI
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
SHARP
SONY
TOSHIBA
VICTOR
YAMAHA
2815
2800, 2801, 2802
2808
2804, 2805, 2806
2812, 2813
2809, 2810, 2811
2803
2814
2807
LD PLAYER
CARVER
DENON
MARANTZ
MITSUBISHI
NAD
NAGSMI
OPTIMUS
PHILIPS
PIONEER
SALORA
SONY
TELEFUNKEN
YAMAHA
0091
0086
0091
0086
0086
0086
0086
0091
0086
0091
0228
0086
2200
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD
ONKYO
SHARP
SONY
YAMAHA
0708
0895
0888
0517
2500, 2501, 2502
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC
AIWA
0558
0185, 1116, 1415,
1432, 1668
ALCO
1417
ANAM
1636
APEX DIGITAL
1284
AUDIOLAB
1216
AUDIOTRONIC
1216
AUDIOVOX 1417
BOSE
1256
ix
APPENDIX
ABC
0030, 0035
AMERICAST 0926
BELL SOUTH 0926
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
0303
BRITISH TELECOM 0030
CABLE & WIRELESS
1095
DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
DIRECTOR
0503
FILMNET
0470
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837,
GOLDSTAR 0171
HAMLIN
0036, 0300
JERROLD
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837
LG
0171
MNET
0470
MEMOREX
0027
MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,
1133
NTL
1095
NOOS
0844
ONO
1095
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
0030
PACE
0264, 1087, 1095
PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134
PARAGON
0027
PHILIPS
0332, 0344
PIONEER
0171, 0560, 0904,
1904
PULSAR
0027
QUASAR
0027
REGAL
0300, 0306
RUNCO
0027
SAGEM
0844
SAMSUNG
0027, 0171
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
SONY
1033
STARCOM
0030
SUPERCABLE
0303
TS
0030
TELE+1
0470
TELEWEST
1095
TORX
0030
TOSHIBA
0027
TRANS PX
0303
UNITED CABLE
0030
ZENITH
0027, 0552, 0926
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
0056
CARVER
0184, 0206
CYRUS
0184
DKK
0027
DMX ELECTRONICS
0184
DENON
0900
DYNAMIC BASS
0206
EMERSON
0332
FISHER
0206
GENEXXA
0059, 0332
GOODMANS 0332
GRUNDIG
0184
HARMAN/KARDON
0184, 0200
HITACHI
0059
JVC
0099
KENWOOD
0055, 0064
KRELL
0184
LXI
0332
LINN
0184
MCS
0056
MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332
MARANTZ
0056, 0184
MATSUI
0184
MEMOREX
0332
MERIDIAN
0184
MICROMEGA 0184
MIRO
0027
MISSION
0184
MYRYAD
0184
NAD
0027
NSM
0184
NAIM
0184
OPTIMUS
0027, 0059, 0064,
0206, 0332
PANASONIC 0056
PHILIPS
0184
PIONEER
0059, 0332
POLK AUDIO 0184
PROTON
0184
QED
0184
QUAD
0184
QUASAR
0056
RCA
0059, 0206, 0332
REALISTIC
0206
REVOX
0184
ROTEL
0184
SAE
0184
SANSUI
0184, 0332
SANYO
0206
SCOTT
0332
SEARS
0332
SHARP
0064
SIMAUDIO
0184
SONIC FRONTIERS 0184
SONY
0027
SYMPHONIC 0332
TAG MCLAREN
0184
TANDY
0059
TECHNICS
0056
THORENS
0184
THULE
0184
UNIVERSUM 0184
VICTOR
0099
WARDS
0184
YAMAHA
2300, 2301
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
1397
CAPETRONIC 0558
CARVER
1116, 1216
CENTREX
1284
DENON
1387
FERGUSON 0558
FINE ARTS
1216
GRUNDIG
1216
HARMAN/KARDON
0137, 1331
INTEGRA
0162, 1325
JBL
0137, 1333
JVC
0101, 0558, 1401,
1522
KLH
1417, 1439
KENWOOD
1054, 1340
MCS
0066
MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,
1296,
MARANTZ
0066, 1116, 1216,
1316
MICROMEGA 1216
MUSICMAGIC
1116
MYRYAD
1216
NAD
0347
NORCENT
1416
ONKYO
0162, 0869, 1325
OPTIMUS
0558, 1050
PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,
1790
PHILIPS
1116, 1216, 1293,
1295, 1296, 1310,
1316
PIONEER
0041, 0558, 1050,
1411
POLK AUDIO 1316
PROSCAN
1281
QUASAR
0066
RCA
0558, 1050, 1281,
1417, 1636,
SABA
0558
SANSUI
1116
SCHNEIDER 0558
SONY
0185, 1085, 1185,
1685, 1785
STEREOPHONICS 1050
SUNFIRE
1340
TEAC
1417
TECHNICS
0066, 1335, 1336,
1545
TELEFUNKEN
0558
THOMSON
1281
THORENS
1216
UHER
0558
VENTURER
1417
VICTOR
0101
WARDS
0041, 0185
YAMAHA
0203, 1203, 1358,
2601
(TUNER ID1)
2602
(TUNER ID2)
2603
(XM ID1)
2604
(XM ID2)
2605
(iPod)
2606
(NET)
2607
SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT
ABSAT
ALBA
ALPHASTAR
AMSTRAD
ASTON
x
1327
0150
0482
0799
0874
0169, 1156
ASTRO
0200
ATSAT
1327
AVALON
0423
BLAUPUNKT 0200
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
0874, 1202
CANAL DIGITAL
0880
CANAL SATELLITE 0880
CANAL+
0880
CHAPARRAL 0243
CITYCOM
1203
CONNEXIONS
0423
CROSSDIGITAL
1136
CYRUS
0227
D-BOX
0750, 1154
DMT
1102
DNT
0227, 0423
DAERYUNG 0423
DAEWOO
1323
DIGENIUS
0326
DIRECTV
0274, 0419, 0593,
0666, 0751, 0776,
0846, 1103, 1136,
1169, 1776, 1883
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
0802, 1032
DISHPRO
0802, 1032
DISTRATEL 0111
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
1264
ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,
0802, 0880, 0898,
1032, 1113
ENGEL
1044
EXPRESSVU 0802
FTE
0890
FINLUX
0482
FRACARRO 0898
FUBA
0423
GE
0593
GOI
0802
GALAXIS
0890, 1138
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0896
GOLD BOX
0880
GRUNDIG
0200, 0874
HTS
0802
HIRSCHMANN
0200, 0423
HITACHI
0482, 0846
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
0776, 1169, 1776
HUMAX
0890, 1203
INVIDEO
0898
JVC
0802
KATHREIN
0150, 0200, 0227,
0276, 0685, 1248
KREISELMEYER
0200
LABGEAR
1323
LOGIX
1044
LORENZEN 0326
MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751
MANHATTAN
0482, 1044,
1110
MARANTZ
0227
MEDIASAT
0880
MEMOREX
0751
METRONIC
0111
MITSUBISHI 0776
MOTOROLA 0896
MYRYAD
0227
NEXT LEVEL 0896
NOKIA
0482, 0750, 0778,
1154, 1250, 1750
OCTALTV
1032
ORBITECH
PACE
1127
0482, 0874, 1202,
1350
PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,
1347
PANDA
0482
PAYSAT
0751
PHILIPS
0160, 0227, 0482,
0749, 0751, 0776,
0880, 1103, 1169,
1776
PIONEER
0880
PROMAX
0482
PROSCAN
0419, 0593
RCA
0170, 0419, 0593,
0882
RFT
0227
RADIOSHACK
0896
RADIOLA
0227
RADIX
0423
SKY
0874, 0883, 1202
SM ELECTRONIC 1227
SABRE
0482
SAGEM
0847, 1141, 1280
SAMSUNG
1044, 1136, 1303,
1319
SAT CONTROL
1327
SATSTATION 1110
SCHWAIGER 1138
SEEMANN
0423
SIEMENS
0200
SONY
0666, 0874, 1666
STAR CHOICE
0896
STRONG
1327
TPS
0847, 1280
TANTEC
0482
TECHNISAT 1126, 1127
TELESTAR
1127
THOMSON
0482, 0880, 1073,
1318
TOPFIELD
1233
TOSHIBA
0776, 0817, 1776
ULTIMATETV
0419, 0666
UNIDEN
0749, 0751
UNIVERSUM 0200
VENTANA
0227
WISI
0200, 0423, 0482
XSAT
0150
ZEHNDER
1102
ZENITH
0883, 1883
TAPE DECK
AIWA
0056
CARVER
0056
GRUNDIG
0056
HARMAN/KARDON
0056
MAGNAVOX 0056
MARANTZ
0056
MYRYAD
0056
OPTIMUS
0054
PHILIPS
0056
PIONEER
0054
POLK AUDIO 0056
RCA
0054
REVOX
0056
SANSUI
0056
SONY
0270
THORENS
0056
WARDS
0054
YAMAHA
2700,2701
TV
AGB
AOC
0543
0036, 0057, 0087,
0119, 0120, 0135,
0205, 0207, 0478
ASA
0131
AWA
0036
ACURA
0036
ADDISON
0119, 0135, 0680
ADMIRAL
0120, 0190, 0490
ADVENT
0788
AIKO
0119
AKAI
0036, 0057, 0235,
0388, 0543, 0729,
0839
AKURA
0291
ALBA
0036, 0064, 0398,
0695
AMERICA ACTION 0207
AMPRO
0778
AMSTRAD
0036, 0064, 0198,
0398, 0439, 0460,
0543
ANAM
0036, 0207, 0277
ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677
ANITECH
0036
APEX DIGITAL
0775, 0792,
0794
AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136
BANG & OLUFSEN 0592
BASIC
0036
BAUR
0064, 0388, 0539
BAYSONIC
0207
BEAUMARK 0205
BEKO
0397, 0513, 0741,
0742
BELL & HOWELL 0181
BEON
0064
BLAUPUNKT 0222
BLUE SKY
0695, 1064
BONDSTEC 0274
BRADFORD 0207
BRANDT
0136, 0362
BROKSONIC 0263, 0490
BUSH
0036, 0064, 0398,
0401, 0695, 1064
CCE
0064
CGE
0274
CTC
0274
CXC
0207
CANDLE
0057
CARNIVALE 0057
CARVER
0081, 0197
CASCADE
0036
CATHAY
0064
CELEBRITY 0027
CELERA
0792
CENTURION 0064
CHANGHONG
0792
CHING TAI
0036, 0119
CHUN YUN
0027, 0036, 0119,
0207
CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207
CIMLINE
0036
CINERAL
0119, 0478
CITIZEN
0057, 0087, 0119
CLARION
0207
CLARIVOX
0064
CLATRONIC 0274, 0397
CONDOR
0347, 0397
CONRAC
0835
CONTEC
CRAIG
CROSLEY
CROWN
GRANADA
0064, 0235, 0366,
0543
GRANDIN
0637
GRUNDIG
0064, 0222, 0514,
0583, 0614
GRUNPY
0207
HCM
0036, 0439
HALLMARK 0205
HANKOOK
0057, 0205, 0207
HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,
0455, 0583
HANTAREX 0543
HARMAN/KARDON 0081
HARVARD
0207
HAVERMY
0120
HELLO KITTY
0478
HINARI
0036, 0064
HISAWA
0482
HITACHI
0036, 0057, 0119,
0132, 0136, 0172,
0190, 0205, 0252,
0383, 0508, 0575,
0605, 1172, 1283
HUA TUN
0036
HUANYU
0401
HYPSON
0064, 0291
ICE
0291, 0398
ITS
0398
ITT
0190, 0388, 0575
IMPERIAL
0274, 0397, 0445
INDIANA
0064
INFINITY
0081
INGELEN
0190
INNO HIT
0543
INNOVA
0064
INTEQ
0044
INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,
0388, 0539
INTERVISION
0064, 0291,
0404
JBL
0081
JCB
0027
JVC
0080, 0398, 0490,
0680, 0710
JEAN
0036, 0078, 0119,
0183, 0263
JENSEN
0788
KEC
0207
KTV
0057, 0207
KAISUI
0036
KAPSCH
0190
KARCHER
0637
KATHREIN
0583
KENDO
0064
KENWOOD
0057
KNEISSEL
0286, 0462
KOLIN
0080, 0135, 0207
KORPEL
0064
KOYODA
0036
L&S ELECTRONIC 0835
LG
0057, 0064, 0087,
0135, 0205, 0741
LXI
0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0205
LEYCO
0064, 0291
LIESENK & TTER 0064
LOEWE
0539
LUXOR
0383, 0388
M ELECTRONIC
0036, 0064,
0131, 0132, 0136,
0190, 0314, 0373,
0401, 0507
MGA
0057, 0177, 0205
MTC
0057, 0087, 0539
MAGNADYNE
0274, 0543
MAGNAFON 0543
MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,
1481
MANESTH
0291, 0347
MARANTZ
0057, 0064, 0081,
0583
MARK
0064
MATSUI
0036, 0064, 0235,
0398, 0514, 0543
MATSUSHITA
0277, 0677
MEDIATOR 0064
MEDION
0695, 0835, 1064
MEGATRON 0172, 0205
MEMOREX
0036, 0177, 0181,
0205, 0277, 0490,
1064
METZ
0474
MICROMAXX
0835
MICROSTAR 0835
MIDLAND
0044, 0074, 0078
MINERVA
0514
MINOKA
0439
MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,
0177, 0181, 0205,
0207, 0263, 0277,
0539, 0863, 1277
MIVAR
0318,0319, 0543,
0636
MOTOROLA 0120
MULTITECH 0036, 0207
MYRYAD
0583
NAD
0183, 0205, 0388,
0893
NEC
0036, 0057, 0078,
0181, 0183, 0197,
0205, 0482, 0524,
1731
NEI
0064
NTC
0119
NECKERMANN
0064, 0583
NETSAT
0064
NEWAVE
0036, 0119, 0120,
0205
NIKKAI
0064, 0291
NIKKO
0057, 0119, 0205
NOKIA
0388, 0500, 0507,
0575, 0658
NORCENT
0775, 0851
NORDMENDE
0136, 0314,
0587
OCEANIC
0190, 0388
ONWA
0207, 0460
OPTIMUS
0181, 0193, 0277,
0677
OPTONICA
0120
ORION
0064, 0263, 0347,
0490, 0543
OSAKI
0291, 0439
OTTO VERSAND
0064, 0347,
0539, 0583
PALLADIUM 0397, 0445
PANAMA
0291
PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,
0190, 0277, 0677,
1437
PATHE CINEMA
0265, 0347
PAUSA
0036
PENNEY
0057, 0074, 0078,
0087, 0183, 0205,
1374
PERDIO
0347
PHILCO
0057, 0064, 0081,
0172, 0205, 0207,
0274, 0490, 1688
PHILIPS
0027, 0057, 0064,
0078, 0081, 0119,
0135, 0205, 0401,
0583, 0717, 1481
PHONOLA
0064
PILOT
0057
PIONEER
0136, 0190, 0193,
0314, 0706, 0787,
0893
PORTLAND 0119
PRANDONI-PRINCE
0543
PRIMA
0788
PRISM
0078
PROFEX
0036, 0388
PROSCAN
0074
PROTECH
0036, 0064, 0274,
0291, 0445, 0695
PROTON
0036, 0057, 0205
PULSAR
0044
QUASAR
0078, 0277, 0677
QUELLE
0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
R-LINE
0064
RCA
0027, 0057, 0074,
0117, 0119, 0205,
0706, 1074, 1174,
1274, 1374, 1474,
1481, 1574
RFT
0455
RADIOSHACK
0057, 0074,
0181, 0205, 0207
RADIOLA
0064
RADIOMARELLI
0543
REALISTIC
0057, 0181, 0205,
0207
REDIFFUSION
0388
REOC
0741
REVOX
0064
REX
0190, 0286, 0291
ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445
RUNCO
0044, 0057, 0524,
0630
SBR
0064
SEG
0291, 0695
SEI
0543
SKY
0064
SSS
0207
SABA
0136, 0190, 0314,
0362
SACCS
0265
SAGEM
0637
SAISHO
0036, 0291, 0543
SALORA
0190, 0380, 0388,
0575
SAMBERS
0543
SAMPO
0036, 0057, 0119,
0120, 0181, 0198,
0205, 0677, 1782
SAMSUNG
0036, 0057, 0064,
0087, 0117, 0119,
0181, 0205, 0291,
0397, 0583, 0614,
0645, 0729, 0793,
0839, 0841
SANSEI
0478
SANSUI
0490
SANYO
0131, 0181, 0207,
0235, 0366, 0826
SCHAUB LORENZ 0388
SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,
0695
SCOTCH
0205
SCOTT
0205, 0207, 0263
xi
APPENDIX
0036, 0207
0207
0081
0036, 0064, 0207,
0397, 0445
CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,
0081, 0087, 0120,
0172, 0181, 0193,
0478, 0729, 1174,
1374
DAEWOO
0036, 0057, 0064,
0119, 0135, 0181,
0197, 0205, 0207,
0401, 0478, 0650,
0661, 1688
DANSAI
0064
DAYTON
0036
DE GRAAF
0235, 0575
DECCA
0064, 0543
DENON
0172
DIGATRON
0064
DIXI
0036, 0064
DUMONT
0044
DWIN
0747, 0801
ECE
0064
ELBE
0286
ELECTROBAND
0027
ELIN
0064, 0575
ELITE
0347
ELTA
0036
EMERSON
0181, 0205, 0207,
0263, 0388, 0490,
0650
ENVISION
0057,0840
EPSON
0860
ERRES
0064
ETHER
0036, 0057
ETRON
0036
EUROPHON 0543
FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,
0265, 0314, 0362,
0587
FIDELITY
0388
FINLANDIA 0235, 0373
FINLUX
0064, 0131, 0132,
0373, 0543
FIRSTAR
0036, 0263
FIRSTLINE
0036, 0274, 0695
FISHER
0131, 0181, 0235,
0397
FLINT
0482
FORMENTI
0064, 0347
FORTRESS
0120
FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291
FUJITSU
0710, 0836
FUNAI
0207, 0198, 0291
FUTURETECH
0207
GE
0057, 0074, 0078,
0119, 0205, 0207,
0478, 0587, 1174,
1374, 1481
GEC
0064, 0543
GATEWAY
1782, 1783
GELOSO
0036
GENEXXA
0190
GIBRALTER 0044, 0057
GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,
0181, 0205, 0404
GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,
0661
GOREMJE
0397
GRADIENTE 0080, 0197
GRAETZ
0190, 0388
SEARS
0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0198, 0205
SELECO
0190, 0286
SEMIVOX
0207
SEMP
0183
SHARP
0057, 0120, 0677
SHEN YING 0036, 0119
SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263
SIAREM
0543
SIEMENS
0064, 0222
SINUDYNE
0543
SKANTIC
0383
SKYGIANT
0207
SKYWORTH 0064
SOLAVOX
0190
SONITRON
0235
SONOKO
0036, 0064
SONOLOR
0190, 0235
SONTEC
0064
SONY
0027, 0677, 0861,
1127, 1532, 1678
SOUNDESIGN
0205, 0207
SOUNDWAVE
0064, 0445
SOWA
0078, 0087, 0119,
0183, 0205
SQUAREVIEW
0198
STANDARD 0036
STARLITE
0207
STERN
0190, 0286
SUPREME
0027
SYLVANIA
0057, 0081, 0198
SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207
SYNCO
0027, 0087, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0478
SYSLINE
0064
T+A
0474
TCM
0835
TMK
0205
TNCI
0044
TVS
0490
TACICO
0036, 0119, 0205
TAI YI
0036
TANDY
0120, 0190
TASHIKO
0119, 0677
TATUNG
0036, 0064, 0078,
0081, 0087, 0181,
0183, 0543
TEAC
0036, 0064, 0291,
0439, 0445, 0482,
0695, 1064
TEC
0274
TECHNEMA 0347
TECHNICS
0078, 0277, 0677
TECHWOOD 0078
TECO
0036, 0078, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0291,
0680
TEKNIKA
0081, 0087, 0119,
0177, 0207
TELEFUNKEN
0136, 0289,
0362, 0652, 0729
TELEMEISTER
0347
TELETECH
0036
TENSAI
0347
TERA
0057
THOMSON
0136, 0314, 0587,
0652, 1474
THORN
0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
TOSHIBA
0087, 0181, 0183,
0535, 0645, 0677,
0859, 1283, 1383,
1683, 1731
TRIUMPH
0543
TUNTEX
0036, 0057, 0119
xii
UHER
0347
UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,
0291, 0373, 0397,
0519
VECTOR RESEARCH
0057
VESTEL
0064
VICTOR
0080, 0277, 0677,
0680
VIDEOSAT
0274
VIDIKRON
0081
VIDTECH
0205
VIEWSONIC 1782
VISION
0347
VOXSON
0190
WALTHAM
0383
WARDS
0057, 0081, 0205,
0893
WATSON
0064, 0347
WAYCON
0183
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0064, 0347, 0490,
0650
YAMAHA
0057, 0172, 0677,
0796, 0860,
2900 (projector),
2901 (projector),
2903,
2904 (projector)
YAPSHE
0277
YOKO
0064, 0291
ZENITH
0044, 0119, 0205,
0490
VCR
ASA
ADMIRAL
ADVENTURA
AIKO
AIWA
0064, 0108
0075
0027
0305
0027, 0064, 0334,
0375, 0379
AKAI
0068, 0342
AKIBA
0099
ALBA
0099, 0305, 0342,
0379
AMERICA ACTION 0305
AMERICAN HIGH 0062
AMSTRAD
0027
ANAM
0064, 0253, 0267,
0305, 0507
ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589
ANITECH
0099
ASHA
0267
ASUKA
0064
AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305
BAIRD
0027, 0068, 0131
BASIC LINE 0099, 0305
BEAUMARK 0267
BELL & HOWELL 0131
BLAUPUNKT 0253
BRANDT
0347
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
0068
BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506
BUSH
0099, 0305, 0379
CCE
0099, 0305
CGE
0027
CALIX
0064
CANON
0062
CARVER
0108
CIMLINE
0099
CINERAL
0305
CITIZEN
0064, 0305, 1305
COLT
0099
COMBITECH 0379
CRAIG
0064, 0074, 0099,
0267
CROWN
0099, 0305
CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,
0087, 1062
CYBERNEX 0267
CYRUS
0108
DAEWOO
0072, 0131, 0305,
0669, 1305
DANSAI
0099
DE GRAAF
0069
DECCA
0027, 0108
DENON
0069
DUAL
0068
DUMONT
0027, 0108, 0131
DYNATECH 0027
ESC
0267, 0305
ELCATECH
0099
ELECTROHOME
0064
ELECTROPHONIC 0064
EMEREX
0059
EMERSON
0027, 0062, 0064,
0070, 0072, 0211,
0267, 0305, 1305,
1506
FERGUSON 0068, 0347
FIDELITY
0027
FINLANDIA 0108, 0131
FINLUX
0027, 0069, 0108,
0131
FIRSTLINE
0064, 0070, 0072,
0099
FISHER
0074, 0131
FUJI
0060, 0062
FUJITSU
0027, 0072
FUNAI
0027
GE
0062, 0087, 0267,
0834, 1062, 1087
GEC
0108
GARRARD
0027
GENERAL
0072
GO VIDEO
0459
GOLDHAND 0099
GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,
1264
GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,
0305
GRADIENTE 0027
GRAETZ
0068, 0131, 0267
GRANADA
0108, 0131
GRANDIN
0027, 0064, 0099
GRUNDIG
0099, 0108, 0253,
0374
HCM
0099
HI-Q
0074
HANSEATIC 0064
HARLEY DAVIDSON
0027
HARMAN/KARDON 0108
HARWOOD
0099
HINARI
0099, 0267, 0379
HITACHI
0027, 0064, 0068,
0069, 0267
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0069
HYPSON
0099
ITT
0068, 0131, 0267
ITV
0064, 0305
IMPERIAL
0027
INTERFUNK 0108
JVC
0068, 0072, 0094
JENSEN
0068
KEC
0064, 0305
KLH
0099
KAISUI
KENWOOD
KODAK
KOLIN
KORPEL
LG
0099
0068, 0094
0062, 0064
0068, 0070
0099
0064, 0069, 0072,
0507
LXI
0064
LENCO
0305
LEYCO
0099
LLOYD’S
0027
LOEWE
0064, 0108, 1589
LOGIK
0099, 0267
LUXOR
0070, 0075, 0131
M ELECTRONIC
0027
MEI
0062
MGA
0070, 0267
MGN TECHNOLOGY
0267
MTC
0027, 0267
MAGNASONIC
1305
MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,
0108, 1808
MAGNIN
0267
MANESTH
0072, 0099
MARANTZ
0062, 0108
MARTA
0064
MATSUI
0375, 0379
MATSUSHITA
0062
MEDION
0375
MEMOREX
0027, 0062, 0064,
0066, 0074, 0075,
0131, 0267, 0334,
0375, 1264
MEMPHIS
0099
METZ
0064, 0374, 1589
MINOLTA
0069
MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,
0108, 0834
MOTOROLA 0062, 0075
MULTITECH 0027, 0099
MURPHY
0027
MYRYAD
0108
NAD
0131
NEC
0062, 0064, 0068,
0075, 0094, 0131
NATIONAL
0253
NECKERMANN
0108
NESCO
0099
NEWAVE
0064
NIKKO
0064
NOBLEX
0267
NOKIA
0068, 0131, 0267
NORDMENDE
0068, 0347
OCEANIC
0027, 0068
OKANO
0342, 0375
OLYMPUS
0062, 0253
OPTIMUS
0064, 0075, 0131,
0459
ORION
0211, 0375, 0379,
1506
OSAKI
0027, 0064, 0099
OTTO VERSAND
0108
PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099
PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,
0643, 1062, 1589
PATHE MARCONI 0068
PENNEY
0062, 0064, 0069,
0267, 1062, 1264
PENTAX
0069
PERDIO
0027
PHILCO
0062
PHILIPS
0062, 0108, 0645,
1108, 1208
PHONOLA
0108
TELEAVIA
TELEFUNKEN
TENOSAL
TENSAI
THOMAS
THOMSON
0068
0068, 0347
0099
0027
0027
0068, 0087, 0094,
0347
THORN
0068, 0131
TIVO
0645, 0663
TOSHIBA
0068, 0070, 0072,
0094, 0108, 0872
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267
UHER
0267
UNITECH
0267
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,
0267
VECTOR
0072
VICTOR
0068, 0094
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072
VIDEOMAGIC
0064
VIDEOSONIC 0267
VILLAIN
0027
WARDS
0027, 0062, 0069,
0074, 0075, 0087,
0099, 0108, 0267
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0099
XR-1000
0027, 0062, 0099
YAMAHA
0068
YAMISHI
0099
YOKAN
0099
YOKO
0267
ZENITH
0027, 0060, 0066,
1506
APPENDIX
PILOT
0064
PIONEER
0069, 0094, 0108
POLK AUDIO 0108
PROFITRONIC
0267
PROLINE
0027
PROSCAN
0087, 1087
PROTEC
0099
PULSAR
0066
PYE
0108
QUASAR
0062, 1062
QUELLE
0108
RCA
0062, 0069, 0087,
0267, 0834, 1062,
1087
RADIOSHACK
0027
RADIOLA
0108
RADIX
0064
RANDEX
0064
REALISTIC
0027, 0062, 0064,
0074, 0075, 0131
REOC
0375
REPLAYTV
0641, 0643
REX
0068
ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,
0305
RUNCO
0066
SBR
0108
SEG
0267
SEI
0108
STS
0069
SABA
0068, 0347
SALORA
0070
SAMPO
0064, 0075
SAMSUNG
0072, 0267, 0459
SANKY
0066, 0075
SANSUI
0027, 0068, 0094,
1506
SANYO
0074, 0131, 0267
SAVILLE
0379
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,
0131
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108
SCOTT
0070, 0072, 0211
SEARS
0027, 0062, 0064,
0069, 0074, 0131,
1264
SELECO
0068
SEMP
0072
SHARP
0075, 0834
SHINTOM
0099, 0131
SIEMENS
0064, 0108, 0131
SILVA
0064
SINGER
0072, 0099
SINUDYNE
0108
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643
SONTEC
0064
SONY
0027, 0059, 0060,
0062, 0663, 1259
SUNKAI
0375
SUNSTAR
0027
SUNTRONIC 0027
SYLVANIA
0027, 0062, 0108,
0070, 1808
SYMPHONIC 0027
TMK
0267
TANDY
0027, 0131
TASHIKO
0027, 0064
TATUNG
0027, 0068, 0072,
0094, 0108
TEAC
0027, 0068, 0305,
0334, 0669
TECHNICS
0062, 0253
TECO
0062, 0064, 0068,
0075
TEKNIKA
0027, 0062, 0064
xiii
RX-V2700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 24, 2006 3:36 PM
U
RX-V2700
RX-V2700
AV Receiver
© 2006
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
All rights reserved.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Printed in Malaysia
WJ55210